xref: /vim-8.2.3635/src/misc1.c (revision 044b68f4)
1 /* vi:set ts=8 sts=4 sw=4:
2  *
3  * VIM - Vi IMproved	by Bram Moolenaar
4  *
5  * Do ":help uganda"  in Vim to read copying and usage conditions.
6  * Do ":help credits" in Vim to see a list of people who contributed.
7  * See README.txt for an overview of the Vim source code.
8  */
9 
10 /*
11  * misc1.c: functions that didn't seem to fit elsewhere
12  */
13 
14 #include "vim.h"
15 #include "version.h"
16 
17 #ifdef HAVE_FCNTL_H
18 # include <fcntl.h>		/* for chdir() */
19 #endif
20 
21 static char_u *vim_version_dir __ARGS((char_u *vimdir));
22 static char_u *remove_tail __ARGS((char_u *p, char_u *pend, char_u *name));
23 static int copy_indent __ARGS((int size, char_u	*src));
24 
25 /*
26  * Count the size (in window cells) of the indent in the current line.
27  */
28     int
29 get_indent()
30 {
31     return get_indent_str(ml_get_curline(), (int)curbuf->b_p_ts);
32 }
33 
34 /*
35  * Count the size (in window cells) of the indent in line "lnum".
36  */
37     int
38 get_indent_lnum(lnum)
39     linenr_T	lnum;
40 {
41     return get_indent_str(ml_get(lnum), (int)curbuf->b_p_ts);
42 }
43 
44 #if defined(FEAT_FOLDING) || defined(PROTO)
45 /*
46  * Count the size (in window cells) of the indent in line "lnum" of buffer
47  * "buf".
48  */
49     int
50 get_indent_buf(buf, lnum)
51     buf_T	*buf;
52     linenr_T	lnum;
53 {
54     return get_indent_str(ml_get_buf(buf, lnum, FALSE), (int)buf->b_p_ts);
55 }
56 #endif
57 
58 /*
59  * count the size (in window cells) of the indent in line "ptr", with
60  * 'tabstop' at "ts"
61  */
62     int
63 get_indent_str(ptr, ts)
64     char_u	*ptr;
65     int		ts;
66 {
67     int		count = 0;
68 
69     for ( ; *ptr; ++ptr)
70     {
71 	if (*ptr == TAB)    /* count a tab for what it is worth */
72 	    count += ts - (count % ts);
73 	else if (*ptr == ' ')
74 	    ++count;		/* count a space for one */
75 	else
76 	    break;
77     }
78     return count;
79 }
80 
81 /*
82  * Set the indent of the current line.
83  * Leaves the cursor on the first non-blank in the line.
84  * Caller must take care of undo.
85  * "flags":
86  *	SIN_CHANGED:	call changed_bytes() if the line was changed.
87  *	SIN_INSERT:	insert the indent in front of the line.
88  *	SIN_UNDO:	save line for undo before changing it.
89  * Returns TRUE if the line was changed.
90  */
91     int
92 set_indent(size, flags)
93     int		size;
94     int		flags;
95 {
96     char_u	*p;
97     char_u	*newline;
98     char_u	*oldline;
99     char_u	*s;
100     int		todo;
101     int		ind_len;
102     int		line_len;
103     int		doit = FALSE;
104     int		ind_done;
105     int		tab_pad;
106     int		retval = FALSE;
107 
108     /*
109      * First check if there is anything to do and compute the number of
110      * characters needed for the indent.
111      */
112     todo = size;
113     ind_len = 0;
114     p = oldline = ml_get_curline();
115 
116     /* Calculate the buffer size for the new indent, and check to see if it
117      * isn't already set */
118 
119     /* if 'expandtab' isn't set: use TABs */
120     if (!curbuf->b_p_et)
121     {
122 	/* If 'preserveindent' is set then reuse as much as possible of
123 	 * the existing indent structure for the new indent */
124 	if (!(flags & SIN_INSERT) && curbuf->b_p_pi)
125 	{
126 	    ind_done = 0;
127 
128 	    /* count as many characters as we can use */
129 	    while (todo > 0 && vim_iswhite(*p))
130 	    {
131 		if (*p == TAB)
132 		{
133 		    tab_pad = (int)curbuf->b_p_ts
134 					   - (ind_done % (int)curbuf->b_p_ts);
135 		    /* stop if this tab will overshoot the target */
136 		    if (todo < tab_pad)
137 			break;
138 		    todo -= tab_pad;
139 		    ++ind_len;
140 		    ind_done += tab_pad;
141 		}
142 		else
143 		{
144 		    --todo;
145 		    ++ind_len;
146 		    ++ind_done;
147 		}
148 		++p;
149 	    }
150 
151 	    /* Fill to next tabstop with a tab, if possible */
152 	    tab_pad = (int)curbuf->b_p_ts - (ind_done % (int)curbuf->b_p_ts);
153 	    if (todo >= tab_pad)
154 	    {
155 		doit = TRUE;
156 		todo -= tab_pad;
157 		++ind_len;
158 		/* ind_done += tab_pad; */
159 	    }
160 	}
161 
162 	/* count tabs required for indent */
163 	while (todo >= (int)curbuf->b_p_ts)
164 	{
165 	    if (*p != TAB)
166 		doit = TRUE;
167 	    else
168 		++p;
169 	    todo -= (int)curbuf->b_p_ts;
170 	    ++ind_len;
171 	    /* ind_done += (int)curbuf->b_p_ts; */
172 	}
173     }
174     /* count spaces required for indent */
175     while (todo > 0)
176     {
177 	if (*p != ' ')
178 	    doit = TRUE;
179 	else
180 	    ++p;
181 	--todo;
182 	++ind_len;
183 	/* ++ind_done; */
184     }
185 
186     /* Return if the indent is OK already. */
187     if (!doit && !vim_iswhite(*p) && !(flags & SIN_INSERT))
188 	return FALSE;
189 
190     /* Allocate memory for the new line. */
191     if (flags & SIN_INSERT)
192 	p = oldline;
193     else
194 	p = skipwhite(p);
195     line_len = (int)STRLEN(p) + 1;
196     newline = alloc(ind_len + line_len);
197     if (newline == NULL)
198 	return FALSE;
199 
200     /* Put the characters in the new line. */
201     s = newline;
202     todo = size;
203     /* if 'expandtab' isn't set: use TABs */
204     if (!curbuf->b_p_et)
205     {
206 	/* If 'preserveindent' is set then reuse as much as possible of
207 	 * the existing indent structure for the new indent */
208 	if (!(flags & SIN_INSERT) && curbuf->b_p_pi)
209 	{
210 	    p = oldline;
211 	    ind_done = 0;
212 
213 	    while (todo > 0 && vim_iswhite(*p))
214 	    {
215 		if (*p == TAB)
216 		{
217 		    tab_pad = (int)curbuf->b_p_ts
218 					   - (ind_done % (int)curbuf->b_p_ts);
219 		    /* stop if this tab will overshoot the target */
220 		    if (todo < tab_pad)
221 			break;
222 		    todo -= tab_pad;
223 		    ind_done += tab_pad;
224 		}
225 		else
226 		{
227 		    --todo;
228 		    ++ind_done;
229 		}
230 		*s++ = *p++;
231 	    }
232 
233 	    /* Fill to next tabstop with a tab, if possible */
234 	    tab_pad = (int)curbuf->b_p_ts - (ind_done % (int)curbuf->b_p_ts);
235 	    if (todo >= tab_pad)
236 	    {
237 		*s++ = TAB;
238 		todo -= tab_pad;
239 	    }
240 
241 	    p = skipwhite(p);
242 	}
243 
244 	while (todo >= (int)curbuf->b_p_ts)
245 	{
246 	    *s++ = TAB;
247 	    todo -= (int)curbuf->b_p_ts;
248 	}
249     }
250     while (todo > 0)
251     {
252 	*s++ = ' ';
253 	--todo;
254     }
255     mch_memmove(s, p, (size_t)line_len);
256 
257     /* Replace the line (unless undo fails). */
258     if (!(flags & SIN_UNDO) || u_savesub(curwin->w_cursor.lnum) == OK)
259     {
260 	ml_replace(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, newline, FALSE);
261 	if (flags & SIN_CHANGED)
262 	    changed_bytes(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, 0);
263 	/* Correct saved cursor position if it's after the indent. */
264 	if (saved_cursor.lnum == curwin->w_cursor.lnum
265 				&& saved_cursor.col >= (colnr_T)(p - oldline))
266 	    saved_cursor.col += ind_len - (colnr_T)(p - oldline);
267 	retval = TRUE;
268     }
269     else
270 	vim_free(newline);
271 
272     curwin->w_cursor.col = ind_len;
273     return retval;
274 }
275 
276 /*
277  * Copy the indent from ptr to the current line (and fill to size)
278  * Leaves the cursor on the first non-blank in the line.
279  * Returns TRUE if the line was changed.
280  */
281     static int
282 copy_indent(size, src)
283     int		size;
284     char_u	*src;
285 {
286     char_u	*p = NULL;
287     char_u	*line = NULL;
288     char_u	*s;
289     int		todo;
290     int		ind_len;
291     int		line_len = 0;
292     int		tab_pad;
293     int		ind_done;
294     int		round;
295 
296     /* Round 1: compute the number of characters needed for the indent
297      * Round 2: copy the characters. */
298     for (round = 1; round <= 2; ++round)
299     {
300 	todo = size;
301 	ind_len = 0;
302 	ind_done = 0;
303 	s = src;
304 
305 	/* Count/copy the usable portion of the source line */
306 	while (todo > 0 && vim_iswhite(*s))
307 	{
308 	    if (*s == TAB)
309 	    {
310 		tab_pad = (int)curbuf->b_p_ts
311 					   - (ind_done % (int)curbuf->b_p_ts);
312 		/* Stop if this tab will overshoot the target */
313 		if (todo < tab_pad)
314 		    break;
315 		todo -= tab_pad;
316 		ind_done += tab_pad;
317 	    }
318 	    else
319 	    {
320 		--todo;
321 		++ind_done;
322 	    }
323 	    ++ind_len;
324 	    if (p != NULL)
325 		*p++ = *s;
326 	    ++s;
327 	}
328 
329 	/* Fill to next tabstop with a tab, if possible */
330 	tab_pad = (int)curbuf->b_p_ts - (ind_done % (int)curbuf->b_p_ts);
331 	if (todo >= tab_pad)
332 	{
333 	    todo -= tab_pad;
334 	    ++ind_len;
335 	    if (p != NULL)
336 		*p++ = TAB;
337 	}
338 
339 	/* Add tabs required for indent */
340 	while (todo >= (int)curbuf->b_p_ts)
341 	{
342 	    todo -= (int)curbuf->b_p_ts;
343 	    ++ind_len;
344 	    if (p != NULL)
345 		*p++ = TAB;
346 	}
347 
348 	/* Count/add spaces required for indent */
349 	while (todo > 0)
350 	{
351 	    --todo;
352 	    ++ind_len;
353 	    if (p != NULL)
354 		*p++ = ' ';
355 	}
356 
357 	if (p == NULL)
358 	{
359 	    /* Allocate memory for the result: the copied indent, new indent
360 	     * and the rest of the line. */
361 	    line_len = (int)STRLEN(ml_get_curline()) + 1;
362 	    line = alloc(ind_len + line_len);
363 	    if (line == NULL)
364 		return FALSE;
365 	    p = line;
366 	}
367     }
368 
369     /* Append the original line */
370     mch_memmove(p, ml_get_curline(), (size_t)line_len);
371 
372     /* Replace the line */
373     ml_replace(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, line, FALSE);
374 
375     /* Put the cursor after the indent. */
376     curwin->w_cursor.col = ind_len;
377     return TRUE;
378 }
379 
380 /*
381  * Return the indent of the current line after a number.  Return -1 if no
382  * number was found.  Used for 'n' in 'formatoptions': numbered list.
383  * Since a pattern is used it can actually handle more than numbers.
384  */
385     int
386 get_number_indent(lnum)
387     linenr_T	lnum;
388 {
389     colnr_T	col;
390     pos_T	pos;
391     regmmatch_T	regmatch;
392 
393     if (lnum > curbuf->b_ml.ml_line_count)
394 	return -1;
395     pos.lnum = 0;
396     regmatch.regprog = vim_regcomp(curbuf->b_p_flp, RE_MAGIC);
397     if (regmatch.regprog != NULL)
398     {
399 	regmatch.rmm_ic = FALSE;
400 	regmatch.rmm_maxcol = 0;
401 	if (vim_regexec_multi(&regmatch, curwin, curbuf, lnum, (colnr_T)0))
402 	{
403 	    pos.lnum = regmatch.endpos[0].lnum + lnum;
404 	    pos.col = regmatch.endpos[0].col;
405 #ifdef FEAT_VIRTUALEDIT
406 	    pos.coladd = 0;
407 #endif
408 	}
409 	vim_free(regmatch.regprog);
410     }
411 
412     if (pos.lnum == 0 || *ml_get_pos(&pos) == NUL)
413 	return -1;
414     getvcol(curwin, &pos, &col, NULL, NULL);
415     return (int)col;
416 }
417 
418 #if defined(FEAT_CINDENT) || defined(FEAT_SMARTINDENT)
419 
420 static int cin_is_cinword __ARGS((char_u *line));
421 
422 /*
423  * Return TRUE if the string "line" starts with a word from 'cinwords'.
424  */
425     static int
426 cin_is_cinword(line)
427     char_u	*line;
428 {
429     char_u	*cinw;
430     char_u	*cinw_buf;
431     int		cinw_len;
432     int		retval = FALSE;
433     int		len;
434 
435     cinw_len = (int)STRLEN(curbuf->b_p_cinw) + 1;
436     cinw_buf = alloc((unsigned)cinw_len);
437     if (cinw_buf != NULL)
438     {
439 	line = skipwhite(line);
440 	for (cinw = curbuf->b_p_cinw; *cinw; )
441 	{
442 	    len = copy_option_part(&cinw, cinw_buf, cinw_len, ",");
443 	    if (STRNCMP(line, cinw_buf, len) == 0
444 		    && (!vim_iswordc(line[len]) || !vim_iswordc(line[len - 1])))
445 	    {
446 		retval = TRUE;
447 		break;
448 	    }
449 	}
450 	vim_free(cinw_buf);
451     }
452     return retval;
453 }
454 #endif
455 
456 /*
457  * open_line: Add a new line below or above the current line.
458  *
459  * For VREPLACE mode, we only add a new line when we get to the end of the
460  * file, otherwise we just start replacing the next line.
461  *
462  * Caller must take care of undo.  Since VREPLACE may affect any number of
463  * lines however, it may call u_save_cursor() again when starting to change a
464  * new line.
465  * "flags": OPENLINE_DELSPACES	delete spaces after cursor
466  *	    OPENLINE_DO_COM	format comments
467  *	    OPENLINE_KEEPTRAIL	keep trailing spaces
468  *	    OPENLINE_MARKFIX	adjust mark positions after the line break
469  *
470  * Return TRUE for success, FALSE for failure
471  */
472     int
473 open_line(dir, flags, old_indent)
474     int		dir;		/* FORWARD or BACKWARD */
475     int		flags;
476     int		old_indent;	/* indent for after ^^D in Insert mode */
477 {
478     char_u	*saved_line;		/* copy of the original line */
479     char_u	*next_line = NULL;	/* copy of the next line */
480     char_u	*p_extra = NULL;	/* what goes to next line */
481     int		less_cols = 0;		/* less columns for mark in new line */
482     int		less_cols_off = 0;	/* columns to skip for mark adjust */
483     pos_T	old_cursor;		/* old cursor position */
484     int		newcol = 0;		/* new cursor column */
485     int		newindent = 0;		/* auto-indent of the new line */
486     int		n;
487     int		trunc_line = FALSE;	/* truncate current line afterwards */
488     int		retval = FALSE;		/* return value, default is FAIL */
489 #ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
490     int		extra_len = 0;		/* length of p_extra string */
491     int		lead_len;		/* length of comment leader */
492     char_u	*lead_flags;	/* position in 'comments' for comment leader */
493     char_u	*leader = NULL;		/* copy of comment leader */
494 #endif
495     char_u	*allocated = NULL;	/* allocated memory */
496 #if defined(FEAT_SMARTINDENT) || defined(FEAT_VREPLACE) || defined(FEAT_LISP) \
497 	|| defined(FEAT_CINDENT) || defined(FEAT_COMMENTS)
498     char_u	*p;
499 #endif
500     int		saved_char = NUL;	/* init for GCC */
501 #if defined(FEAT_SMARTINDENT) || defined(FEAT_COMMENTS)
502     pos_T	*pos;
503 #endif
504 #ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
505     int		do_si = (!p_paste && curbuf->b_p_si
506 # ifdef FEAT_CINDENT
507 					&& !curbuf->b_p_cin
508 # endif
509 			);
510     int		no_si = FALSE;		/* reset did_si afterwards */
511     int		first_char = NUL;	/* init for GCC */
512 #endif
513 #if defined(FEAT_VREPLACE) && (defined(FEAT_LISP) || defined(FEAT_CINDENT))
514     int		vreplace_mode;
515 #endif
516     int		did_append;		/* appended a new line */
517     int		saved_pi = curbuf->b_p_pi; /* copy of preserveindent setting */
518 
519     /*
520      * make a copy of the current line so we can mess with it
521      */
522     saved_line = vim_strsave(ml_get_curline());
523     if (saved_line == NULL)	    /* out of memory! */
524 	return FALSE;
525 
526 #ifdef FEAT_VREPLACE
527     if (State & VREPLACE_FLAG)
528     {
529 	/*
530 	 * With VREPLACE we make a copy of the next line, which we will be
531 	 * starting to replace.  First make the new line empty and let vim play
532 	 * with the indenting and comment leader to its heart's content.  Then
533 	 * we grab what it ended up putting on the new line, put back the
534 	 * original line, and call ins_char() to put each new character onto
535 	 * the line, replacing what was there before and pushing the right
536 	 * stuff onto the replace stack.  -- webb.
537 	 */
538 	if (curwin->w_cursor.lnum < orig_line_count)
539 	    next_line = vim_strsave(ml_get(curwin->w_cursor.lnum + 1));
540 	else
541 	    next_line = vim_strsave((char_u *)"");
542 	if (next_line == NULL)	    /* out of memory! */
543 	    goto theend;
544 
545 	/*
546 	 * In VREPLACE mode, a NL replaces the rest of the line, and starts
547 	 * replacing the next line, so push all of the characters left on the
548 	 * line onto the replace stack.  We'll push any other characters that
549 	 * might be replaced at the start of the next line (due to autoindent
550 	 * etc) a bit later.
551 	 */
552 	replace_push(NUL);  /* Call twice because BS over NL expects it */
553 	replace_push(NUL);
554 	p = saved_line + curwin->w_cursor.col;
555 	while (*p != NUL)
556 	    replace_push(*p++);
557 	saved_line[curwin->w_cursor.col] = NUL;
558     }
559 #endif
560 
561     if ((State & INSERT)
562 #ifdef FEAT_VREPLACE
563 	    && !(State & VREPLACE_FLAG)
564 #endif
565 	    )
566     {
567 	p_extra = saved_line + curwin->w_cursor.col;
568 #ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
569 	if (do_si)		/* need first char after new line break */
570 	{
571 	    p = skipwhite(p_extra);
572 	    first_char = *p;
573 	}
574 #endif
575 #ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
576 	extra_len = (int)STRLEN(p_extra);
577 #endif
578 	saved_char = *p_extra;
579 	*p_extra = NUL;
580     }
581 
582     u_clearline();		/* cannot do "U" command when adding lines */
583 #ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
584     did_si = FALSE;
585 #endif
586     ai_col = 0;
587 
588     /*
589      * If we just did an auto-indent, then we didn't type anything on
590      * the prior line, and it should be truncated.  Do this even if 'ai' is not
591      * set because automatically inserting a comment leader also sets did_ai.
592      */
593     if (dir == FORWARD && did_ai)
594 	trunc_line = TRUE;
595 
596     /*
597      * If 'autoindent' and/or 'smartindent' is set, try to figure out what
598      * indent to use for the new line.
599      */
600     if (curbuf->b_p_ai
601 #ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
602 			|| do_si
603 #endif
604 					    )
605     {
606 	/*
607 	 * count white space on current line
608 	 */
609 	newindent = get_indent_str(saved_line, (int)curbuf->b_p_ts);
610 	if (newindent == 0)
611 	    newindent = old_indent;	/* for ^^D command in insert mode */
612 
613 #ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
614 	/*
615 	 * Do smart indenting.
616 	 * In insert/replace mode (only when dir == FORWARD)
617 	 * we may move some text to the next line. If it starts with '{'
618 	 * don't add an indent. Fixes inserting a NL before '{' in line
619 	 *	"if (condition) {"
620 	 */
621 	if (!trunc_line && do_si && *saved_line != NUL
622 				    && (p_extra == NULL || first_char != '{'))
623 	{
624 	    char_u  *ptr;
625 	    char_u  last_char;
626 
627 	    old_cursor = curwin->w_cursor;
628 	    ptr = saved_line;
629 # ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
630 	    if (flags & OPENLINE_DO_COM)
631 		lead_len = get_leader_len(ptr, NULL, FALSE);
632 	    else
633 		lead_len = 0;
634 # endif
635 	    if (dir == FORWARD)
636 	    {
637 		/*
638 		 * Skip preprocessor directives, unless they are
639 		 * recognised as comments.
640 		 */
641 		if (
642 # ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
643 			lead_len == 0 &&
644 # endif
645 			ptr[0] == '#')
646 		{
647 		    while (ptr[0] == '#' && curwin->w_cursor.lnum > 1)
648 			ptr = ml_get(--curwin->w_cursor.lnum);
649 		    newindent = get_indent();
650 		}
651 # ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
652 		if (flags & OPENLINE_DO_COM)
653 		    lead_len = get_leader_len(ptr, NULL, FALSE);
654 		else
655 		    lead_len = 0;
656 		if (lead_len > 0)
657 		{
658 		    /*
659 		     * This case gets the following right:
660 		     *	    \*
661 		     *	     * A comment (read '\' as '/').
662 		     *	     *\
663 		     * #define IN_THE_WAY
664 		     *	    This should line up here;
665 		     */
666 		    p = skipwhite(ptr);
667 		    if (p[0] == '/' && p[1] == '*')
668 			p++;
669 		    if (p[0] == '*')
670 		    {
671 			for (p++; *p; p++)
672 			{
673 			    if (p[0] == '/' && p[-1] == '*')
674 			    {
675 				/*
676 				 * End of C comment, indent should line up
677 				 * with the line containing the start of
678 				 * the comment
679 				 */
680 				curwin->w_cursor.col = (colnr_T)(p - ptr);
681 				if ((pos = findmatch(NULL, NUL)) != NULL)
682 				{
683 				    curwin->w_cursor.lnum = pos->lnum;
684 				    newindent = get_indent();
685 				}
686 			    }
687 			}
688 		    }
689 		}
690 		else	/* Not a comment line */
691 # endif
692 		{
693 		    /* Find last non-blank in line */
694 		    p = ptr + STRLEN(ptr) - 1;
695 		    while (p > ptr && vim_iswhite(*p))
696 			--p;
697 		    last_char = *p;
698 
699 		    /*
700 		     * find the character just before the '{' or ';'
701 		     */
702 		    if (last_char == '{' || last_char == ';')
703 		    {
704 			if (p > ptr)
705 			    --p;
706 			while (p > ptr && vim_iswhite(*p))
707 			    --p;
708 		    }
709 		    /*
710 		     * Try to catch lines that are split over multiple
711 		     * lines.  eg:
712 		     *	    if (condition &&
713 		     *			condition) {
714 		     *		Should line up here!
715 		     *	    }
716 		     */
717 		    if (*p == ')')
718 		    {
719 			curwin->w_cursor.col = (colnr_T)(p - ptr);
720 			if ((pos = findmatch(NULL, '(')) != NULL)
721 			{
722 			    curwin->w_cursor.lnum = pos->lnum;
723 			    newindent = get_indent();
724 			    ptr = ml_get_curline();
725 			}
726 		    }
727 		    /*
728 		     * If last character is '{' do indent, without
729 		     * checking for "if" and the like.
730 		     */
731 		    if (last_char == '{')
732 		    {
733 			did_si = TRUE;	/* do indent */
734 			no_si = TRUE;	/* don't delete it when '{' typed */
735 		    }
736 		    /*
737 		     * Look for "if" and the like, use 'cinwords'.
738 		     * Don't do this if the previous line ended in ';' or
739 		     * '}'.
740 		     */
741 		    else if (last_char != ';' && last_char != '}'
742 						       && cin_is_cinword(ptr))
743 			did_si = TRUE;
744 		}
745 	    }
746 	    else /* dir == BACKWARD */
747 	    {
748 		/*
749 		 * Skip preprocessor directives, unless they are
750 		 * recognised as comments.
751 		 */
752 		if (
753 # ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
754 			lead_len == 0 &&
755 # endif
756 			ptr[0] == '#')
757 		{
758 		    int was_backslashed = FALSE;
759 
760 		    while ((ptr[0] == '#' || was_backslashed) &&
761 			 curwin->w_cursor.lnum < curbuf->b_ml.ml_line_count)
762 		    {
763 			if (*ptr && ptr[STRLEN(ptr) - 1] == '\\')
764 			    was_backslashed = TRUE;
765 			else
766 			    was_backslashed = FALSE;
767 			ptr = ml_get(++curwin->w_cursor.lnum);
768 		    }
769 		    if (was_backslashed)
770 			newindent = 0;	    /* Got to end of file */
771 		    else
772 			newindent = get_indent();
773 		}
774 		p = skipwhite(ptr);
775 		if (*p == '}')	    /* if line starts with '}': do indent */
776 		    did_si = TRUE;
777 		else		    /* can delete indent when '{' typed */
778 		    can_si_back = TRUE;
779 	    }
780 	    curwin->w_cursor = old_cursor;
781 	}
782 	if (do_si)
783 	    can_si = TRUE;
784 #endif /* FEAT_SMARTINDENT */
785 
786 	did_ai = TRUE;
787     }
788 
789 #ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
790     /*
791      * Find out if the current line starts with a comment leader.
792      * This may then be inserted in front of the new line.
793      */
794     end_comment_pending = NUL;
795     if (flags & OPENLINE_DO_COM)
796 	lead_len = get_leader_len(saved_line, &lead_flags, dir == BACKWARD);
797     else
798 	lead_len = 0;
799     if (lead_len > 0)
800     {
801 	char_u	*lead_repl = NULL;	    /* replaces comment leader */
802 	int	lead_repl_len = 0;	    /* length of *lead_repl */
803 	char_u	lead_middle[COM_MAX_LEN];   /* middle-comment string */
804 	char_u	lead_end[COM_MAX_LEN];	    /* end-comment string */
805 	char_u	*comment_end = NULL;	    /* where lead_end has been found */
806 	int	extra_space = FALSE;	    /* append extra space */
807 	int	current_flag;
808 	int	require_blank = FALSE;	    /* requires blank after middle */
809 	char_u	*p2;
810 
811 	/*
812 	 * If the comment leader has the start, middle or end flag, it may not
813 	 * be used or may be replaced with the middle leader.
814 	 */
815 	for (p = lead_flags; *p && *p != ':'; ++p)
816 	{
817 	    if (*p == COM_BLANK)
818 	    {
819 		require_blank = TRUE;
820 		continue;
821 	    }
822 	    if (*p == COM_START || *p == COM_MIDDLE)
823 	    {
824 		current_flag = *p;
825 		if (*p == COM_START)
826 		{
827 		    /*
828 		     * Doing "O" on a start of comment does not insert leader.
829 		     */
830 		    if (dir == BACKWARD)
831 		    {
832 			lead_len = 0;
833 			break;
834 		    }
835 
836 		    /* find start of middle part */
837 		    (void)copy_option_part(&p, lead_middle, COM_MAX_LEN, ",");
838 		    require_blank = FALSE;
839 		}
840 
841 		/*
842 		 * Isolate the strings of the middle and end leader.
843 		 */
844 		while (*p && p[-1] != ':')	/* find end of middle flags */
845 		{
846 		    if (*p == COM_BLANK)
847 			require_blank = TRUE;
848 		    ++p;
849 		}
850 		(void)copy_option_part(&p, lead_middle, COM_MAX_LEN, ",");
851 
852 		while (*p && p[-1] != ':')	/* find end of end flags */
853 		{
854 		    /* Check whether we allow automatic ending of comments */
855 		    if (*p == COM_AUTO_END)
856 			end_comment_pending = -1; /* means we want to set it */
857 		    ++p;
858 		}
859 		n = copy_option_part(&p, lead_end, COM_MAX_LEN, ",");
860 
861 		if (end_comment_pending == -1)	/* we can set it now */
862 		    end_comment_pending = lead_end[n - 1];
863 
864 		/*
865 		 * If the end of the comment is in the same line, don't use
866 		 * the comment leader.
867 		 */
868 		if (dir == FORWARD)
869 		{
870 		    for (p = saved_line + lead_len; *p; ++p)
871 			if (STRNCMP(p, lead_end, n) == 0)
872 			{
873 			    comment_end = p;
874 			    lead_len = 0;
875 			    break;
876 			}
877 		}
878 
879 		/*
880 		 * Doing "o" on a start of comment inserts the middle leader.
881 		 */
882 		if (lead_len > 0)
883 		{
884 		    if (current_flag == COM_START)
885 		    {
886 			lead_repl = lead_middle;
887 			lead_repl_len = (int)STRLEN(lead_middle);
888 		    }
889 
890 		    /*
891 		     * If we have hit RETURN immediately after the start
892 		     * comment leader, then put a space after the middle
893 		     * comment leader on the next line.
894 		     */
895 		    if (!vim_iswhite(saved_line[lead_len - 1])
896 			    && ((p_extra != NULL
897 				    && (int)curwin->w_cursor.col == lead_len)
898 				|| (p_extra == NULL
899 				    && saved_line[lead_len] == NUL)
900 				|| require_blank))
901 			extra_space = TRUE;
902 		}
903 		break;
904 	    }
905 	    if (*p == COM_END)
906 	    {
907 		/*
908 		 * Doing "o" on the end of a comment does not insert leader.
909 		 * Remember where the end is, might want to use it to find the
910 		 * start (for C-comments).
911 		 */
912 		if (dir == FORWARD)
913 		{
914 		    comment_end = skipwhite(saved_line);
915 		    lead_len = 0;
916 		    break;
917 		}
918 
919 		/*
920 		 * Doing "O" on the end of a comment inserts the middle leader.
921 		 * Find the string for the middle leader, searching backwards.
922 		 */
923 		while (p > curbuf->b_p_com && *p != ',')
924 		    --p;
925 		for (lead_repl = p; lead_repl > curbuf->b_p_com
926 					 && lead_repl[-1] != ':'; --lead_repl)
927 		    ;
928 		lead_repl_len = (int)(p - lead_repl);
929 
930 		/* We can probably always add an extra space when doing "O" on
931 		 * the comment-end */
932 		extra_space = TRUE;
933 
934 		/* Check whether we allow automatic ending of comments */
935 		for (p2 = p; *p2 && *p2 != ':'; p2++)
936 		{
937 		    if (*p2 == COM_AUTO_END)
938 			end_comment_pending = -1; /* means we want to set it */
939 		}
940 		if (end_comment_pending == -1)
941 		{
942 		    /* Find last character in end-comment string */
943 		    while (*p2 && *p2 != ',')
944 			p2++;
945 		    end_comment_pending = p2[-1];
946 		}
947 		break;
948 	    }
949 	    if (*p == COM_FIRST)
950 	    {
951 		/*
952 		 * Comment leader for first line only:	Don't repeat leader
953 		 * when using "O", blank out leader when using "o".
954 		 */
955 		if (dir == BACKWARD)
956 		    lead_len = 0;
957 		else
958 		{
959 		    lead_repl = (char_u *)"";
960 		    lead_repl_len = 0;
961 		}
962 		break;
963 	    }
964 	}
965 	if (lead_len)
966 	{
967 	    /* allocate buffer (may concatenate p_exta later) */
968 	    leader = alloc(lead_len + lead_repl_len + extra_space +
969 							      extra_len + 1);
970 	    allocated = leader;		    /* remember to free it later */
971 
972 	    if (leader == NULL)
973 		lead_len = 0;
974 	    else
975 	    {
976 		vim_strncpy(leader, saved_line, lead_len);
977 
978 		/*
979 		 * Replace leader with lead_repl, right or left adjusted
980 		 */
981 		if (lead_repl != NULL)
982 		{
983 		    int		c = 0;
984 		    int		off = 0;
985 
986 		    for (p = lead_flags; *p && *p != ':'; ++p)
987 		    {
988 			if (*p == COM_RIGHT || *p == COM_LEFT)
989 			    c = *p;
990 			else if (VIM_ISDIGIT(*p) || *p == '-')
991 			    off = getdigits(&p);
992 		    }
993 		    if (c == COM_RIGHT)    /* right adjusted leader */
994 		    {
995 			/* find last non-white in the leader to line up with */
996 			for (p = leader + lead_len - 1; p > leader
997 						      && vim_iswhite(*p); --p)
998 			    ;
999 			++p;
1000 
1001 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
1002 			/* Compute the length of the replaced characters in
1003 			 * screen characters, not bytes. */
1004 			{
1005 			    int	    repl_size = vim_strnsize(lead_repl,
1006 							       lead_repl_len);
1007 			    int	    old_size = 0;
1008 			    char_u  *endp = p;
1009 			    int	    l;
1010 
1011 			    while (old_size < repl_size && p > leader)
1012 			    {
1013 				mb_ptr_back(leader, p);
1014 				old_size += ptr2cells(p);
1015 			    }
1016 			    l = lead_repl_len - (int)(endp - p);
1017 			    if (l != 0)
1018 				mch_memmove(endp + l, endp,
1019 					(size_t)((leader + lead_len) - endp));
1020 			    lead_len += l;
1021 			}
1022 #else
1023 			if (p < leader + lead_repl_len)
1024 			    p = leader;
1025 			else
1026 			    p -= lead_repl_len;
1027 #endif
1028 			mch_memmove(p, lead_repl, (size_t)lead_repl_len);
1029 			if (p + lead_repl_len > leader + lead_len)
1030 			    p[lead_repl_len] = NUL;
1031 
1032 			/* blank-out any other chars from the old leader. */
1033 			while (--p >= leader)
1034 			{
1035 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
1036 			    int l = mb_head_off(leader, p);
1037 
1038 			    if (l > 1)
1039 			    {
1040 				p -= l;
1041 				if (ptr2cells(p) > 1)
1042 				{
1043 				    p[1] = ' ';
1044 				    --l;
1045 				}
1046 				mch_memmove(p + 1, p + l + 1,
1047 				   (size_t)((leader + lead_len) - (p + l + 1)));
1048 				lead_len -= l;
1049 				*p = ' ';
1050 			    }
1051 			    else
1052 #endif
1053 			    if (!vim_iswhite(*p))
1054 				*p = ' ';
1055 			}
1056 		    }
1057 		    else		    /* left adjusted leader */
1058 		    {
1059 			p = skipwhite(leader);
1060 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
1061 			/* Compute the length of the replaced characters in
1062 			 * screen characters, not bytes. Move the part that is
1063 			 * not to be overwritten. */
1064 			{
1065 			    int	    repl_size = vim_strnsize(lead_repl,
1066 							       lead_repl_len);
1067 			    int	    i;
1068 			    int	    l;
1069 
1070 			    for (i = 0; p[i] != NUL && i < lead_len; i += l)
1071 			    {
1072 				l = (*mb_ptr2len)(p + i);
1073 				if (vim_strnsize(p, i + l) > repl_size)
1074 				    break;
1075 			    }
1076 			    if (i != lead_repl_len)
1077 			    {
1078 				mch_memmove(p + lead_repl_len, p + i,
1079 				       (size_t)(lead_len - i - (leader - p)));
1080 				lead_len += lead_repl_len - i;
1081 			    }
1082 			}
1083 #endif
1084 			mch_memmove(p, lead_repl, (size_t)lead_repl_len);
1085 
1086 			/* Replace any remaining non-white chars in the old
1087 			 * leader by spaces.  Keep Tabs, the indent must
1088 			 * remain the same. */
1089 			for (p += lead_repl_len; p < leader + lead_len; ++p)
1090 			    if (!vim_iswhite(*p))
1091 			    {
1092 				/* Don't put a space before a TAB. */
1093 				if (p + 1 < leader + lead_len && p[1] == TAB)
1094 				{
1095 				    --lead_len;
1096 				    mch_memmove(p, p + 1,
1097 						     (leader + lead_len) - p);
1098 				}
1099 				else
1100 				{
1101 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
1102 				    int	    l = (*mb_ptr2len)(p);
1103 
1104 				    if (l > 1)
1105 				    {
1106 					if (ptr2cells(p) > 1)
1107 					{
1108 					    /* Replace a double-wide char with
1109 					     * two spaces */
1110 					    --l;
1111 					    *p++ = ' ';
1112 					}
1113 					mch_memmove(p + 1, p + l,
1114 						     (leader + lead_len) - p);
1115 					lead_len -= l - 1;
1116 				    }
1117 #endif
1118 				    *p = ' ';
1119 				}
1120 			    }
1121 			*p = NUL;
1122 		    }
1123 
1124 		    /* Recompute the indent, it may have changed. */
1125 		    if (curbuf->b_p_ai
1126 #ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
1127 					|| do_si
1128 #endif
1129 							   )
1130 			newindent = get_indent_str(leader, (int)curbuf->b_p_ts);
1131 
1132 		    /* Add the indent offset */
1133 		    if (newindent + off < 0)
1134 		    {
1135 			off = -newindent;
1136 			newindent = 0;
1137 		    }
1138 		    else
1139 			newindent += off;
1140 
1141 		    /* Correct trailing spaces for the shift, so that
1142 		     * alignment remains equal. */
1143 		    while (off > 0 && lead_len > 0
1144 					       && leader[lead_len - 1] == ' ')
1145 		    {
1146 			/* Don't do it when there is a tab before the space */
1147 			if (vim_strchr(skipwhite(leader), '\t') != NULL)
1148 			    break;
1149 			--lead_len;
1150 			--off;
1151 		    }
1152 
1153 		    /* If the leader ends in white space, don't add an
1154 		     * extra space */
1155 		    if (lead_len > 0 && vim_iswhite(leader[lead_len - 1]))
1156 			extra_space = FALSE;
1157 		    leader[lead_len] = NUL;
1158 		}
1159 
1160 		if (extra_space)
1161 		{
1162 		    leader[lead_len++] = ' ';
1163 		    leader[lead_len] = NUL;
1164 		}
1165 
1166 		newcol = lead_len;
1167 
1168 		/*
1169 		 * if a new indent will be set below, remove the indent that
1170 		 * is in the comment leader
1171 		 */
1172 		if (newindent
1173 #ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
1174 				|| did_si
1175 #endif
1176 					   )
1177 		{
1178 		    while (lead_len && vim_iswhite(*leader))
1179 		    {
1180 			--lead_len;
1181 			--newcol;
1182 			++leader;
1183 		    }
1184 		}
1185 
1186 	    }
1187 #ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
1188 	    did_si = can_si = FALSE;
1189 #endif
1190 	}
1191 	else if (comment_end != NULL)
1192 	{
1193 	    /*
1194 	     * We have finished a comment, so we don't use the leader.
1195 	     * If this was a C-comment and 'ai' or 'si' is set do a normal
1196 	     * indent to align with the line containing the start of the
1197 	     * comment.
1198 	     */
1199 	    if (comment_end[0] == '*' && comment_end[1] == '/' &&
1200 			(curbuf->b_p_ai
1201 #ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
1202 					|| do_si
1203 #endif
1204 							   ))
1205 	    {
1206 		old_cursor = curwin->w_cursor;
1207 		curwin->w_cursor.col = (colnr_T)(comment_end - saved_line);
1208 		if ((pos = findmatch(NULL, NUL)) != NULL)
1209 		{
1210 		    curwin->w_cursor.lnum = pos->lnum;
1211 		    newindent = get_indent();
1212 		}
1213 		curwin->w_cursor = old_cursor;
1214 	    }
1215 	}
1216     }
1217 #endif
1218 
1219     /* (State == INSERT || State == REPLACE), only when dir == FORWARD */
1220     if (p_extra != NULL)
1221     {
1222 	*p_extra = saved_char;		/* restore char that NUL replaced */
1223 
1224 	/*
1225 	 * When 'ai' set or "flags" has OPENLINE_DELSPACES, skip to the first
1226 	 * non-blank.
1227 	 *
1228 	 * When in REPLACE mode, put the deleted blanks on the replace stack,
1229 	 * preceded by a NUL, so they can be put back when a BS is entered.
1230 	 */
1231 	if (REPLACE_NORMAL(State))
1232 	    replace_push(NUL);	    /* end of extra blanks */
1233 	if (curbuf->b_p_ai || (flags & OPENLINE_DELSPACES))
1234 	{
1235 	    while ((*p_extra == ' ' || *p_extra == '\t')
1236 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
1237 		    && (!enc_utf8
1238 			       || !utf_iscomposing(utf_ptr2char(p_extra + 1)))
1239 #endif
1240 		    )
1241 	    {
1242 		if (REPLACE_NORMAL(State))
1243 		    replace_push(*p_extra);
1244 		++p_extra;
1245 		++less_cols_off;
1246 	    }
1247 	}
1248 	if (*p_extra != NUL)
1249 	    did_ai = FALSE;	    /* append some text, don't truncate now */
1250 
1251 	/* columns for marks adjusted for removed columns */
1252 	less_cols = (int)(p_extra - saved_line);
1253     }
1254 
1255     if (p_extra == NULL)
1256 	p_extra = (char_u *)"";		    /* append empty line */
1257 
1258 #ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
1259     /* concatenate leader and p_extra, if there is a leader */
1260     if (lead_len)
1261     {
1262 	STRCAT(leader, p_extra);
1263 	p_extra = leader;
1264 	did_ai = TRUE;	    /* So truncating blanks works with comments */
1265 	less_cols -= lead_len;
1266     }
1267     else
1268 	end_comment_pending = NUL;  /* turns out there was no leader */
1269 #endif
1270 
1271     old_cursor = curwin->w_cursor;
1272     if (dir == BACKWARD)
1273 	--curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
1274 #ifdef FEAT_VREPLACE
1275     if (!(State & VREPLACE_FLAG) || old_cursor.lnum >= orig_line_count)
1276 #endif
1277     {
1278 	if (ml_append(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, p_extra, (colnr_T)0, FALSE)
1279 								      == FAIL)
1280 	    goto theend;
1281 	/* Postpone calling changed_lines(), because it would mess up folding
1282 	 * with markers. */
1283 	mark_adjust(curwin->w_cursor.lnum + 1, (linenr_T)MAXLNUM, 1L, 0L);
1284 	did_append = TRUE;
1285     }
1286 #ifdef FEAT_VREPLACE
1287     else
1288     {
1289 	/*
1290 	 * In VREPLACE mode we are starting to replace the next line.
1291 	 */
1292 	curwin->w_cursor.lnum++;
1293 	if (curwin->w_cursor.lnum >= Insstart.lnum + vr_lines_changed)
1294 	{
1295 	    /* In case we NL to a new line, BS to the previous one, and NL
1296 	     * again, we don't want to save the new line for undo twice.
1297 	     */
1298 	    (void)u_save_cursor();		    /* errors are ignored! */
1299 	    vr_lines_changed++;
1300 	}
1301 	ml_replace(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, p_extra, TRUE);
1302 	changed_bytes(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, 0);
1303 	curwin->w_cursor.lnum--;
1304 	did_append = FALSE;
1305     }
1306 #endif
1307 
1308     if (newindent
1309 #ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
1310 		    || did_si
1311 #endif
1312 				)
1313     {
1314 	++curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
1315 #ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
1316 	if (did_si)
1317 	{
1318 	    if (p_sr)
1319 		newindent -= newindent % (int)curbuf->b_p_sw;
1320 	    newindent += (int)curbuf->b_p_sw;
1321 	}
1322 #endif
1323 	/* Copy the indent only if expand tab is disabled */
1324 	if (curbuf->b_p_ci && !curbuf->b_p_et)
1325 	{
1326 	    (void)copy_indent(newindent, saved_line);
1327 
1328 	    /*
1329 	     * Set the 'preserveindent' option so that any further screwing
1330 	     * with the line doesn't entirely destroy our efforts to preserve
1331 	     * it.  It gets restored at the function end.
1332 	     */
1333 	    curbuf->b_p_pi = TRUE;
1334 	}
1335 	else
1336 	    (void)set_indent(newindent, SIN_INSERT);
1337 	less_cols -= curwin->w_cursor.col;
1338 
1339 	ai_col = curwin->w_cursor.col;
1340 
1341 	/*
1342 	 * In REPLACE mode, for each character in the new indent, there must
1343 	 * be a NUL on the replace stack, for when it is deleted with BS
1344 	 */
1345 	if (REPLACE_NORMAL(State))
1346 	    for (n = 0; n < (int)curwin->w_cursor.col; ++n)
1347 		replace_push(NUL);
1348 	newcol += curwin->w_cursor.col;
1349 #ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
1350 	if (no_si)
1351 	    did_si = FALSE;
1352 #endif
1353     }
1354 
1355 #ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
1356     /*
1357      * In REPLACE mode, for each character in the extra leader, there must be
1358      * a NUL on the replace stack, for when it is deleted with BS.
1359      */
1360     if (REPLACE_NORMAL(State))
1361 	while (lead_len-- > 0)
1362 	    replace_push(NUL);
1363 #endif
1364 
1365     curwin->w_cursor = old_cursor;
1366 
1367     if (dir == FORWARD)
1368     {
1369 	if (trunc_line || (State & INSERT))
1370 	{
1371 	    /* truncate current line at cursor */
1372 	    saved_line[curwin->w_cursor.col] = NUL;
1373 	    /* Remove trailing white space, unless OPENLINE_KEEPTRAIL used. */
1374 	    if (trunc_line && !(flags & OPENLINE_KEEPTRAIL))
1375 		truncate_spaces(saved_line);
1376 	    ml_replace(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, saved_line, FALSE);
1377 	    saved_line = NULL;
1378 	    if (did_append)
1379 	    {
1380 		changed_lines(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, curwin->w_cursor.col,
1381 					       curwin->w_cursor.lnum + 1, 1L);
1382 		did_append = FALSE;
1383 
1384 		/* Move marks after the line break to the new line. */
1385 		if (flags & OPENLINE_MARKFIX)
1386 		    mark_col_adjust(curwin->w_cursor.lnum,
1387 					 curwin->w_cursor.col + less_cols_off,
1388 							1L, (long)-less_cols);
1389 	    }
1390 	    else
1391 		changed_bytes(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, curwin->w_cursor.col);
1392 	}
1393 
1394 	/*
1395 	 * Put the cursor on the new line.  Careful: the scrollup() above may
1396 	 * have moved w_cursor, we must use old_cursor.
1397 	 */
1398 	curwin->w_cursor.lnum = old_cursor.lnum + 1;
1399     }
1400     if (did_append)
1401 	changed_lines(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, 0, curwin->w_cursor.lnum, 1L);
1402 
1403     curwin->w_cursor.col = newcol;
1404 #ifdef FEAT_VIRTUALEDIT
1405     curwin->w_cursor.coladd = 0;
1406 #endif
1407 
1408 #if defined(FEAT_VREPLACE) && (defined(FEAT_LISP) || defined(FEAT_CINDENT))
1409     /*
1410      * In VREPLACE mode, we are handling the replace stack ourselves, so stop
1411      * fixthisline() from doing it (via change_indent()) by telling it we're in
1412      * normal INSERT mode.
1413      */
1414     if (State & VREPLACE_FLAG)
1415     {
1416 	vreplace_mode = State;	/* So we know to put things right later */
1417 	State = INSERT;
1418     }
1419     else
1420 	vreplace_mode = 0;
1421 #endif
1422 #ifdef FEAT_LISP
1423     /*
1424      * May do lisp indenting.
1425      */
1426     if (!p_paste
1427 # ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
1428 	    && leader == NULL
1429 # endif
1430 	    && curbuf->b_p_lisp
1431 	    && curbuf->b_p_ai)
1432     {
1433 	fixthisline(get_lisp_indent);
1434 	p = ml_get_curline();
1435 	ai_col = (colnr_T)(skipwhite(p) - p);
1436     }
1437 #endif
1438 #ifdef FEAT_CINDENT
1439     /*
1440      * May do indenting after opening a new line.
1441      */
1442     if (!p_paste
1443 	    && (curbuf->b_p_cin
1444 #  ifdef FEAT_EVAL
1445 		    || *curbuf->b_p_inde != NUL
1446 #  endif
1447 		)
1448 	    && in_cinkeys(dir == FORWARD
1449 		? KEY_OPEN_FORW
1450 		: KEY_OPEN_BACK, ' ', linewhite(curwin->w_cursor.lnum)))
1451     {
1452 	do_c_expr_indent();
1453 	p = ml_get_curline();
1454 	ai_col = (colnr_T)(skipwhite(p) - p);
1455     }
1456 #endif
1457 #if defined(FEAT_VREPLACE) && (defined(FEAT_LISP) || defined(FEAT_CINDENT))
1458     if (vreplace_mode != 0)
1459 	State = vreplace_mode;
1460 #endif
1461 
1462 #ifdef FEAT_VREPLACE
1463     /*
1464      * Finally, VREPLACE gets the stuff on the new line, then puts back the
1465      * original line, and inserts the new stuff char by char, pushing old stuff
1466      * onto the replace stack (via ins_char()).
1467      */
1468     if (State & VREPLACE_FLAG)
1469     {
1470 	/* Put new line in p_extra */
1471 	p_extra = vim_strsave(ml_get_curline());
1472 	if (p_extra == NULL)
1473 	    goto theend;
1474 
1475 	/* Put back original line */
1476 	ml_replace(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, next_line, FALSE);
1477 
1478 	/* Insert new stuff into line again */
1479 	curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
1480 #ifdef FEAT_VIRTUALEDIT
1481 	curwin->w_cursor.coladd = 0;
1482 #endif
1483 	ins_bytes(p_extra);	/* will call changed_bytes() */
1484 	vim_free(p_extra);
1485 	next_line = NULL;
1486     }
1487 #endif
1488 
1489     retval = TRUE;		/* success! */
1490 theend:
1491     curbuf->b_p_pi = saved_pi;
1492     vim_free(saved_line);
1493     vim_free(next_line);
1494     vim_free(allocated);
1495     return retval;
1496 }
1497 
1498 #if defined(FEAT_COMMENTS) || defined(PROTO)
1499 /*
1500  * get_leader_len() returns the length of the prefix of the given string
1501  * which introduces a comment.	If this string is not a comment then 0 is
1502  * returned.
1503  * When "flags" is not NULL, it is set to point to the flags of the recognized
1504  * comment leader.
1505  * "backward" must be true for the "O" command.
1506  */
1507     int
1508 get_leader_len(line, flags, backward)
1509     char_u	*line;
1510     char_u	**flags;
1511     int		backward;
1512 {
1513     int		i, j;
1514     int		got_com = FALSE;
1515     int		found_one;
1516     char_u	part_buf[COM_MAX_LEN];	/* buffer for one option part */
1517     char_u	*string;		/* pointer to comment string */
1518     char_u	*list;
1519 
1520     i = 0;
1521     while (vim_iswhite(line[i]))    /* leading white space is ignored */
1522 	++i;
1523 
1524     /*
1525      * Repeat to match several nested comment strings.
1526      */
1527     while (line[i])
1528     {
1529 	/*
1530 	 * scan through the 'comments' option for a match
1531 	 */
1532 	found_one = FALSE;
1533 	for (list = curbuf->b_p_com; *list; )
1534 	{
1535 	    /*
1536 	     * Get one option part into part_buf[].  Advance list to next one.
1537 	     * put string at start of string.
1538 	     */
1539 	    if (!got_com && flags != NULL)  /* remember where flags started */
1540 		*flags = list;
1541 	    (void)copy_option_part(&list, part_buf, COM_MAX_LEN, ",");
1542 	    string = vim_strchr(part_buf, ':');
1543 	    if (string == NULL)	    /* missing ':', ignore this part */
1544 		continue;
1545 	    *string++ = NUL;	    /* isolate flags from string */
1546 
1547 	    /*
1548 	     * When already found a nested comment, only accept further
1549 	     * nested comments.
1550 	     */
1551 	    if (got_com && vim_strchr(part_buf, COM_NEST) == NULL)
1552 		continue;
1553 
1554 	    /* When 'O' flag used don't use for "O" command */
1555 	    if (backward && vim_strchr(part_buf, COM_NOBACK) != NULL)
1556 		continue;
1557 
1558 	    /*
1559 	     * Line contents and string must match.
1560 	     * When string starts with white space, must have some white space
1561 	     * (but the amount does not need to match, there might be a mix of
1562 	     * TABs and spaces).
1563 	     */
1564 	    if (vim_iswhite(string[0]))
1565 	    {
1566 		if (i == 0 || !vim_iswhite(line[i - 1]))
1567 		    continue;
1568 		while (vim_iswhite(string[0]))
1569 		    ++string;
1570 	    }
1571 	    for (j = 0; string[j] != NUL && string[j] == line[i + j]; ++j)
1572 		;
1573 	    if (string[j] != NUL)
1574 		continue;
1575 
1576 	    /*
1577 	     * When 'b' flag used, there must be white space or an
1578 	     * end-of-line after the string in the line.
1579 	     */
1580 	    if (vim_strchr(part_buf, COM_BLANK) != NULL
1581 			   && !vim_iswhite(line[i + j]) && line[i + j] != NUL)
1582 		continue;
1583 
1584 	    /*
1585 	     * We have found a match, stop searching.
1586 	     */
1587 	    i += j;
1588 	    got_com = TRUE;
1589 	    found_one = TRUE;
1590 	    break;
1591 	}
1592 
1593 	/*
1594 	 * No match found, stop scanning.
1595 	 */
1596 	if (!found_one)
1597 	    break;
1598 
1599 	/*
1600 	 * Include any trailing white space.
1601 	 */
1602 	while (vim_iswhite(line[i]))
1603 	    ++i;
1604 
1605 	/*
1606 	 * If this comment doesn't nest, stop here.
1607 	 */
1608 	if (vim_strchr(part_buf, COM_NEST) == NULL)
1609 	    break;
1610     }
1611     return (got_com ? i : 0);
1612 }
1613 #endif
1614 
1615 /*
1616  * Return the number of window lines occupied by buffer line "lnum".
1617  */
1618     int
1619 plines(lnum)
1620     linenr_T	lnum;
1621 {
1622     return plines_win(curwin, lnum, TRUE);
1623 }
1624 
1625     int
1626 plines_win(wp, lnum, winheight)
1627     win_T	*wp;
1628     linenr_T	lnum;
1629     int		winheight;	/* when TRUE limit to window height */
1630 {
1631 #if defined(FEAT_DIFF) || defined(PROTO)
1632     /* Check for filler lines above this buffer line.  When folded the result
1633      * is one line anyway. */
1634     return plines_win_nofill(wp, lnum, winheight) + diff_check_fill(wp, lnum);
1635 }
1636 
1637     int
1638 plines_nofill(lnum)
1639     linenr_T	lnum;
1640 {
1641     return plines_win_nofill(curwin, lnum, TRUE);
1642 }
1643 
1644     int
1645 plines_win_nofill(wp, lnum, winheight)
1646     win_T	*wp;
1647     linenr_T	lnum;
1648     int		winheight;	/* when TRUE limit to window height */
1649 {
1650 #endif
1651     int		lines;
1652 
1653     if (!wp->w_p_wrap)
1654 	return 1;
1655 
1656 #ifdef FEAT_VERTSPLIT
1657     if (wp->w_width == 0)
1658 	return 1;
1659 #endif
1660 
1661 #ifdef FEAT_FOLDING
1662     /* A folded lines is handled just like an empty line. */
1663     /* NOTE: Caller must handle lines that are MAYBE folded. */
1664     if (lineFolded(wp, lnum) == TRUE)
1665 	return 1;
1666 #endif
1667 
1668     lines = plines_win_nofold(wp, lnum);
1669     if (winheight > 0 && lines > wp->w_height)
1670 	return (int)wp->w_height;
1671     return lines;
1672 }
1673 
1674 /*
1675  * Return number of window lines physical line "lnum" will occupy in window
1676  * "wp".  Does not care about folding, 'wrap' or 'diff'.
1677  */
1678     int
1679 plines_win_nofold(wp, lnum)
1680     win_T	*wp;
1681     linenr_T	lnum;
1682 {
1683     char_u	*s;
1684     long	col;
1685     int		width;
1686 
1687     s = ml_get_buf(wp->w_buffer, lnum, FALSE);
1688     if (*s == NUL)		/* empty line */
1689 	return 1;
1690     col = win_linetabsize(wp, s, (colnr_T)MAXCOL);
1691 
1692     /*
1693      * If list mode is on, then the '$' at the end of the line may take up one
1694      * extra column.
1695      */
1696     if (wp->w_p_list && lcs_eol != NUL)
1697 	col += 1;
1698 
1699     /*
1700      * Add column offset for 'number' and 'foldcolumn'.
1701      */
1702     width = W_WIDTH(wp) - win_col_off(wp);
1703     if (width <= 0)
1704 	return 32000;
1705     if (col <= width)
1706 	return 1;
1707     col -= width;
1708     width += win_col_off2(wp);
1709     return (col + (width - 1)) / width + 1;
1710 }
1711 
1712 /*
1713  * Like plines_win(), but only reports the number of physical screen lines
1714  * used from the start of the line to the given column number.
1715  */
1716     int
1717 plines_win_col(wp, lnum, column)
1718     win_T	*wp;
1719     linenr_T	lnum;
1720     long	column;
1721 {
1722     long	col;
1723     char_u	*s;
1724     int		lines = 0;
1725     int		width;
1726 
1727 #ifdef FEAT_DIFF
1728     /* Check for filler lines above this buffer line.  When folded the result
1729      * is one line anyway. */
1730     lines = diff_check_fill(wp, lnum);
1731 #endif
1732 
1733     if (!wp->w_p_wrap)
1734 	return lines + 1;
1735 
1736 #ifdef FEAT_VERTSPLIT
1737     if (wp->w_width == 0)
1738 	return lines + 1;
1739 #endif
1740 
1741     s = ml_get_buf(wp->w_buffer, lnum, FALSE);
1742 
1743     col = 0;
1744     while (*s != NUL && --column >= 0)
1745     {
1746 	col += win_lbr_chartabsize(wp, s, (colnr_T)col, NULL);
1747 	mb_ptr_adv(s);
1748     }
1749 
1750     /*
1751      * If *s is a TAB, and the TAB is not displayed as ^I, and we're not in
1752      * INSERT mode, then col must be adjusted so that it represents the last
1753      * screen position of the TAB.  This only fixes an error when the TAB wraps
1754      * from one screen line to the next (when 'columns' is not a multiple of
1755      * 'ts') -- webb.
1756      */
1757     if (*s == TAB && (State & NORMAL) && (!wp->w_p_list || lcs_tab1))
1758 	col += win_lbr_chartabsize(wp, s, (colnr_T)col, NULL) - 1;
1759 
1760     /*
1761      * Add column offset for 'number', 'foldcolumn', etc.
1762      */
1763     width = W_WIDTH(wp) - win_col_off(wp);
1764     if (width <= 0)
1765 	return 9999;
1766 
1767     lines += 1;
1768     if (col > width)
1769 	lines += (col - width) / (width + win_col_off2(wp)) + 1;
1770     return lines;
1771 }
1772 
1773     int
1774 plines_m_win(wp, first, last)
1775     win_T	*wp;
1776     linenr_T	first, last;
1777 {
1778     int		count = 0;
1779 
1780     while (first <= last)
1781     {
1782 #ifdef FEAT_FOLDING
1783 	int	x;
1784 
1785 	/* Check if there are any really folded lines, but also included lines
1786 	 * that are maybe folded. */
1787 	x = foldedCount(wp, first, NULL);
1788 	if (x > 0)
1789 	{
1790 	    ++count;	    /* count 1 for "+-- folded" line */
1791 	    first += x;
1792 	}
1793 	else
1794 #endif
1795 	{
1796 #ifdef FEAT_DIFF
1797 	    if (first == wp->w_topline)
1798 		count += plines_win_nofill(wp, first, TRUE) + wp->w_topfill;
1799 	    else
1800 #endif
1801 		count += plines_win(wp, first, TRUE);
1802 	    ++first;
1803 	}
1804     }
1805     return (count);
1806 }
1807 
1808 #if defined(FEAT_VREPLACE) || defined(FEAT_INS_EXPAND) || defined(PROTO)
1809 /*
1810  * Insert string "p" at the cursor position.  Stops at a NUL byte.
1811  * Handles Replace mode and multi-byte characters.
1812  */
1813     void
1814 ins_bytes(p)
1815     char_u	*p;
1816 {
1817     ins_bytes_len(p, (int)STRLEN(p));
1818 }
1819 #endif
1820 
1821 #if defined(FEAT_VREPLACE) || defined(FEAT_INS_EXPAND) \
1822 	|| defined(FEAT_COMMENTS) || defined(FEAT_MBYTE) || defined(PROTO)
1823 /*
1824  * Insert string "p" with length "len" at the cursor position.
1825  * Handles Replace mode and multi-byte characters.
1826  */
1827     void
1828 ins_bytes_len(p, len)
1829     char_u	*p;
1830     int		len;
1831 {
1832     int		i;
1833 # ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
1834     int		n;
1835 
1836     for (i = 0; i < len; i += n)
1837     {
1838 	n = (*mb_ptr2len)(p + i);
1839 	ins_char_bytes(p + i, n);
1840     }
1841 # else
1842     for (i = 0; i < len; ++i)
1843 	ins_char(p[i]);
1844 # endif
1845 }
1846 #endif
1847 
1848 /*
1849  * Insert or replace a single character at the cursor position.
1850  * When in REPLACE or VREPLACE mode, replace any existing character.
1851  * Caller must have prepared for undo.
1852  * For multi-byte characters we get the whole character, the caller must
1853  * convert bytes to a character.
1854  */
1855     void
1856 ins_char(c)
1857     int		c;
1858 {
1859 #if defined(FEAT_MBYTE) || defined(PROTO)
1860     char_u	buf[MB_MAXBYTES];
1861     int		n;
1862 
1863     n = (*mb_char2bytes)(c, buf);
1864 
1865     /* When "c" is 0x100, 0x200, etc. we don't want to insert a NUL byte.
1866      * Happens for CTRL-Vu9900. */
1867     if (buf[0] == 0)
1868 	buf[0] = '\n';
1869 
1870     ins_char_bytes(buf, n);
1871 }
1872 
1873     void
1874 ins_char_bytes(buf, charlen)
1875     char_u	*buf;
1876     int		charlen;
1877 {
1878     int		c = buf[0];
1879     int		l, j;
1880 #endif
1881     int		newlen;		/* nr of bytes inserted */
1882     int		oldlen;		/* nr of bytes deleted (0 when not replacing) */
1883     char_u	*p;
1884     char_u	*newp;
1885     char_u	*oldp;
1886     int		linelen;	/* length of old line including NUL */
1887     colnr_T	col;
1888     linenr_T	lnum = curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
1889     int		i;
1890 
1891 #ifdef FEAT_VIRTUALEDIT
1892     /* Break tabs if needed. */
1893     if (virtual_active() && curwin->w_cursor.coladd > 0)
1894 	coladvance_force(getviscol());
1895 #endif
1896 
1897     col = curwin->w_cursor.col;
1898     oldp = ml_get(lnum);
1899     linelen = (int)STRLEN(oldp) + 1;
1900 
1901     /* The lengths default to the values for when not replacing. */
1902     oldlen = 0;
1903 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
1904     newlen = charlen;
1905 #else
1906     newlen = 1;
1907 #endif
1908 
1909     if (State & REPLACE_FLAG)
1910     {
1911 #ifdef FEAT_VREPLACE
1912 	if (State & VREPLACE_FLAG)
1913 	{
1914 	    colnr_T	new_vcol = 0;   /* init for GCC */
1915 	    colnr_T	vcol;
1916 	    int		old_list;
1917 #ifndef FEAT_MBYTE
1918 	    char_u	buf[2];
1919 #endif
1920 
1921 	    /*
1922 	     * Disable 'list' temporarily, unless 'cpo' contains the 'L' flag.
1923 	     * Returns the old value of list, so when finished,
1924 	     * curwin->w_p_list should be set back to this.
1925 	     */
1926 	    old_list = curwin->w_p_list;
1927 	    if (old_list && vim_strchr(p_cpo, CPO_LISTWM) == NULL)
1928 		curwin->w_p_list = FALSE;
1929 
1930 	    /*
1931 	     * In virtual replace mode each character may replace one or more
1932 	     * characters (zero if it's a TAB).  Count the number of bytes to
1933 	     * be deleted to make room for the new character, counting screen
1934 	     * cells.  May result in adding spaces to fill a gap.
1935 	     */
1936 	    getvcol(curwin, &curwin->w_cursor, NULL, &vcol, NULL);
1937 #ifndef FEAT_MBYTE
1938 	    buf[0] = c;
1939 	    buf[1] = NUL;
1940 #endif
1941 	    new_vcol = vcol + chartabsize(buf, vcol);
1942 	    while (oldp[col + oldlen] != NUL && vcol < new_vcol)
1943 	    {
1944 		vcol += chartabsize(oldp + col + oldlen, vcol);
1945 		/* Don't need to remove a TAB that takes us to the right
1946 		 * position. */
1947 		if (vcol > new_vcol && oldp[col + oldlen] == TAB)
1948 		    break;
1949 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
1950 		oldlen += (*mb_ptr2len)(oldp + col + oldlen);
1951 #else
1952 		++oldlen;
1953 #endif
1954 		/* Deleted a bit too much, insert spaces. */
1955 		if (vcol > new_vcol)
1956 		    newlen += vcol - new_vcol;
1957 	    }
1958 	    curwin->w_p_list = old_list;
1959 	}
1960 	else
1961 #endif
1962 	    if (oldp[col] != NUL)
1963 	{
1964 	    /* normal replace */
1965 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
1966 	    oldlen = (*mb_ptr2len)(oldp + col);
1967 #else
1968 	    oldlen = 1;
1969 #endif
1970 	}
1971 
1972 
1973 	/* Push the replaced bytes onto the replace stack, so that they can be
1974 	 * put back when BS is used.  The bytes of a multi-byte character are
1975 	 * done the other way around, so that the first byte is popped off
1976 	 * first (it tells the byte length of the character). */
1977 	replace_push(NUL);
1978 	for (i = 0; i < oldlen; ++i)
1979 	{
1980 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
1981 	    l = (*mb_ptr2len)(oldp + col + i) - 1;
1982 	    for (j = l; j >= 0; --j)
1983 		replace_push(oldp[col + i + j]);
1984 	    i += l;
1985 #else
1986 	    replace_push(oldp[col + i]);
1987 #endif
1988 	}
1989     }
1990 
1991     newp = alloc_check((unsigned)(linelen + newlen - oldlen));
1992     if (newp == NULL)
1993 	return;
1994 
1995     /* Copy bytes before the cursor. */
1996     if (col > 0)
1997 	mch_memmove(newp, oldp, (size_t)col);
1998 
1999     /* Copy bytes after the changed character(s). */
2000     p = newp + col;
2001     mch_memmove(p + newlen, oldp + col + oldlen,
2002 					    (size_t)(linelen - col - oldlen));
2003 
2004     /* Insert or overwrite the new character. */
2005 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
2006     mch_memmove(p, buf, charlen);
2007     i = charlen;
2008 #else
2009     *p = c;
2010     i = 1;
2011 #endif
2012 
2013     /* Fill with spaces when necessary. */
2014     while (i < newlen)
2015 	p[i++] = ' ';
2016 
2017     /* Replace the line in the buffer. */
2018     ml_replace(lnum, newp, FALSE);
2019 
2020     /* mark the buffer as changed and prepare for displaying */
2021     changed_bytes(lnum, col);
2022 
2023     /*
2024      * If we're in Insert or Replace mode and 'showmatch' is set, then briefly
2025      * show the match for right parens and braces.
2026      */
2027     if (p_sm && (State & INSERT)
2028 	    && msg_silent == 0
2029 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
2030 	    && charlen == 1
2031 #endif
2032 #ifdef FEAT_INS_EXPAND
2033 	    && !ins_compl_active()
2034 #endif
2035        )
2036 	showmatch(c);
2037 
2038 #ifdef FEAT_RIGHTLEFT
2039     if (!p_ri || (State & REPLACE_FLAG))
2040 #endif
2041     {
2042 	/* Normal insert: move cursor right */
2043 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
2044 	curwin->w_cursor.col += charlen;
2045 #else
2046 	++curwin->w_cursor.col;
2047 #endif
2048     }
2049     /*
2050      * TODO: should try to update w_row here, to avoid recomputing it later.
2051      */
2052 }
2053 
2054 /*
2055  * Insert a string at the cursor position.
2056  * Note: Does NOT handle Replace mode.
2057  * Caller must have prepared for undo.
2058  */
2059     void
2060 ins_str(s)
2061     char_u	*s;
2062 {
2063     char_u	*oldp, *newp;
2064     int		newlen = (int)STRLEN(s);
2065     int		oldlen;
2066     colnr_T	col;
2067     linenr_T	lnum = curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
2068 
2069 #ifdef FEAT_VIRTUALEDIT
2070     if (virtual_active() && curwin->w_cursor.coladd > 0)
2071 	coladvance_force(getviscol());
2072 #endif
2073 
2074     col = curwin->w_cursor.col;
2075     oldp = ml_get(lnum);
2076     oldlen = (int)STRLEN(oldp);
2077 
2078     newp = alloc_check((unsigned)(oldlen + newlen + 1));
2079     if (newp == NULL)
2080 	return;
2081     if (col > 0)
2082 	mch_memmove(newp, oldp, (size_t)col);
2083     mch_memmove(newp + col, s, (size_t)newlen);
2084     mch_memmove(newp + col + newlen, oldp + col, (size_t)(oldlen - col + 1));
2085     ml_replace(lnum, newp, FALSE);
2086     changed_bytes(lnum, col);
2087     curwin->w_cursor.col += newlen;
2088 }
2089 
2090 /*
2091  * Delete one character under the cursor.
2092  * If "fixpos" is TRUE, don't leave the cursor on the NUL after the line.
2093  * Caller must have prepared for undo.
2094  *
2095  * return FAIL for failure, OK otherwise
2096  */
2097     int
2098 del_char(fixpos)
2099     int		fixpos;
2100 {
2101 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
2102     if (has_mbyte)
2103     {
2104 	/* Make sure the cursor is at the start of a character. */
2105 	mb_adjust_cursor();
2106 	if (*ml_get_cursor() == NUL)
2107 	    return FAIL;
2108 	return del_chars(1L, fixpos);
2109     }
2110 #endif
2111     return del_bytes(1L, fixpos, TRUE);
2112 }
2113 
2114 #if defined(FEAT_MBYTE) || defined(PROTO)
2115 /*
2116  * Like del_bytes(), but delete characters instead of bytes.
2117  */
2118     int
2119 del_chars(count, fixpos)
2120     long	count;
2121     int		fixpos;
2122 {
2123     long	bytes = 0;
2124     long	i;
2125     char_u	*p;
2126     int		l;
2127 
2128     p = ml_get_cursor();
2129     for (i = 0; i < count && *p != NUL; ++i)
2130     {
2131 	l = (*mb_ptr2len)(p);
2132 	bytes += l;
2133 	p += l;
2134     }
2135     return del_bytes(bytes, fixpos, TRUE);
2136 }
2137 #endif
2138 
2139 /*
2140  * Delete "count" bytes under the cursor.
2141  * If "fixpos" is TRUE, don't leave the cursor on the NUL after the line.
2142  * Caller must have prepared for undo.
2143  *
2144  * return FAIL for failure, OK otherwise
2145  */
2146 /*ARGSUSED*/
2147     int
2148 del_bytes(count, fixpos_arg, use_delcombine)
2149     long	count;
2150     int		fixpos_arg;
2151     int		use_delcombine;	    /* 'delcombine' option applies */
2152 {
2153     char_u	*oldp, *newp;
2154     colnr_T	oldlen;
2155     linenr_T	lnum = curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
2156     colnr_T	col = curwin->w_cursor.col;
2157     int		was_alloced;
2158     long	movelen;
2159     int		fixpos = fixpos_arg;
2160 
2161     oldp = ml_get(lnum);
2162     oldlen = (int)STRLEN(oldp);
2163 
2164     /*
2165      * Can't do anything when the cursor is on the NUL after the line.
2166      */
2167     if (col >= oldlen)
2168 	return FAIL;
2169 
2170 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
2171     /* If 'delcombine' is set and deleting (less than) one character, only
2172      * delete the last combining character. */
2173     if (p_deco && use_delcombine && enc_utf8
2174 					 && utfc_ptr2len(oldp + col) >= count)
2175     {
2176 	int	cc[MAX_MCO];
2177 	int	n;
2178 
2179 	(void)utfc_ptr2char(oldp + col, cc);
2180 	if (cc[0] != NUL)
2181 	{
2182 	    /* Find the last composing char, there can be several. */
2183 	    n = col;
2184 	    do
2185 	    {
2186 		col = n;
2187 		count = utf_ptr2len(oldp + n);
2188 		n += count;
2189 	    } while (UTF_COMPOSINGLIKE(oldp + col, oldp + n));
2190 	    fixpos = 0;
2191 	}
2192     }
2193 #endif
2194 
2195     /*
2196      * When count is too big, reduce it.
2197      */
2198     movelen = (long)oldlen - (long)col - count + 1; /* includes trailing NUL */
2199     if (movelen <= 1)
2200     {
2201 	/*
2202 	 * If we just took off the last character of a non-blank line, and
2203 	 * fixpos is TRUE, we don't want to end up positioned at the NUL,
2204 	 * unless "restart_edit" is set or 'virtualedit' contains "onemore".
2205 	 */
2206 	if (col > 0 && fixpos && restart_edit == 0
2207 #ifdef FEAT_VIRTUALEDIT
2208 					      && (ve_flags & VE_ONEMORE) == 0
2209 #endif
2210 					      )
2211 	{
2212 	    --curwin->w_cursor.col;
2213 #ifdef FEAT_VIRTUALEDIT
2214 	    curwin->w_cursor.coladd = 0;
2215 #endif
2216 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
2217 	    if (has_mbyte)
2218 		curwin->w_cursor.col -=
2219 			    (*mb_head_off)(oldp, oldp + curwin->w_cursor.col);
2220 #endif
2221 	}
2222 	count = oldlen - col;
2223 	movelen = 1;
2224     }
2225 
2226     /*
2227      * If the old line has been allocated the deletion can be done in the
2228      * existing line. Otherwise a new line has to be allocated
2229      */
2230     was_alloced = ml_line_alloced();	    /* check if oldp was allocated */
2231 #ifdef FEAT_NETBEANS_INTG
2232     if (was_alloced && usingNetbeans)
2233 	netbeans_removed(curbuf, lnum, col, count);
2234     /* else is handled by ml_replace() */
2235 #endif
2236     if (was_alloced)
2237 	newp = oldp;			    /* use same allocated memory */
2238     else
2239     {					    /* need to allocate a new line */
2240 	newp = alloc((unsigned)(oldlen + 1 - count));
2241 	if (newp == NULL)
2242 	    return FAIL;
2243 	mch_memmove(newp, oldp, (size_t)col);
2244     }
2245     mch_memmove(newp + col, oldp + col + count, (size_t)movelen);
2246     if (!was_alloced)
2247 	ml_replace(lnum, newp, FALSE);
2248 
2249     /* mark the buffer as changed and prepare for displaying */
2250     changed_bytes(lnum, curwin->w_cursor.col);
2251 
2252     return OK;
2253 }
2254 
2255 /*
2256  * Delete from cursor to end of line.
2257  * Caller must have prepared for undo.
2258  *
2259  * return FAIL for failure, OK otherwise
2260  */
2261     int
2262 truncate_line(fixpos)
2263     int		fixpos;	    /* if TRUE fix the cursor position when done */
2264 {
2265     char_u	*newp;
2266     linenr_T	lnum = curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
2267     colnr_T	col = curwin->w_cursor.col;
2268 
2269     if (col == 0)
2270 	newp = vim_strsave((char_u *)"");
2271     else
2272 	newp = vim_strnsave(ml_get(lnum), col);
2273 
2274     if (newp == NULL)
2275 	return FAIL;
2276 
2277     ml_replace(lnum, newp, FALSE);
2278 
2279     /* mark the buffer as changed and prepare for displaying */
2280     changed_bytes(lnum, curwin->w_cursor.col);
2281 
2282     /*
2283      * If "fixpos" is TRUE we don't want to end up positioned at the NUL.
2284      */
2285     if (fixpos && curwin->w_cursor.col > 0)
2286 	--curwin->w_cursor.col;
2287 
2288     return OK;
2289 }
2290 
2291 /*
2292  * Delete "nlines" lines at the cursor.
2293  * Saves the lines for undo first if "undo" is TRUE.
2294  */
2295     void
2296 del_lines(nlines, undo)
2297     long	nlines;		/* number of lines to delete */
2298     int		undo;		/* if TRUE, prepare for undo */
2299 {
2300     long	n;
2301 
2302     if (nlines <= 0)
2303 	return;
2304 
2305     /* save the deleted lines for undo */
2306     if (undo && u_savedel(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, nlines) == FAIL)
2307 	return;
2308 
2309     for (n = 0; n < nlines; )
2310     {
2311 	if (curbuf->b_ml.ml_flags & ML_EMPTY)	    /* nothing to delete */
2312 	    break;
2313 
2314 	ml_delete(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, TRUE);
2315 	++n;
2316 
2317 	/* If we delete the last line in the file, stop */
2318 	if (curwin->w_cursor.lnum > curbuf->b_ml.ml_line_count)
2319 	    break;
2320     }
2321     /* adjust marks, mark the buffer as changed and prepare for displaying */
2322     deleted_lines_mark(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, n);
2323 
2324     curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
2325     check_cursor_lnum();
2326 }
2327 
2328     int
2329 gchar_pos(pos)
2330     pos_T *pos;
2331 {
2332     char_u	*ptr = ml_get_pos(pos);
2333 
2334 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
2335     if (has_mbyte)
2336 	return (*mb_ptr2char)(ptr);
2337 #endif
2338     return (int)*ptr;
2339 }
2340 
2341     int
2342 gchar_cursor()
2343 {
2344 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
2345     if (has_mbyte)
2346 	return (*mb_ptr2char)(ml_get_cursor());
2347 #endif
2348     return (int)*ml_get_cursor();
2349 }
2350 
2351 /*
2352  * Write a character at the current cursor position.
2353  * It is directly written into the block.
2354  */
2355     void
2356 pchar_cursor(c)
2357     int c;
2358 {
2359     *(ml_get_buf(curbuf, curwin->w_cursor.lnum, TRUE)
2360 						  + curwin->w_cursor.col) = c;
2361 }
2362 
2363 #if 0 /* not used */
2364 /*
2365  * Put *pos at end of current buffer
2366  */
2367     void
2368 goto_endofbuf(pos)
2369     pos_T    *pos;
2370 {
2371     char_u  *p;
2372 
2373     pos->lnum = curbuf->b_ml.ml_line_count;
2374     pos->col = 0;
2375     p = ml_get(pos->lnum);
2376     while (*p++)
2377 	++pos->col;
2378 }
2379 #endif
2380 
2381 /*
2382  * When extra == 0: Return TRUE if the cursor is before or on the first
2383  *		    non-blank in the line.
2384  * When extra == 1: Return TRUE if the cursor is before the first non-blank in
2385  *		    the line.
2386  */
2387     int
2388 inindent(extra)
2389     int	    extra;
2390 {
2391     char_u	*ptr;
2392     colnr_T	col;
2393 
2394     for (col = 0, ptr = ml_get_curline(); vim_iswhite(*ptr); ++col)
2395 	++ptr;
2396     if (col >= curwin->w_cursor.col + extra)
2397 	return TRUE;
2398     else
2399 	return FALSE;
2400 }
2401 
2402 /*
2403  * Skip to next part of an option argument: Skip space and comma.
2404  */
2405     char_u *
2406 skip_to_option_part(p)
2407     char_u  *p;
2408 {
2409     if (*p == ',')
2410 	++p;
2411     while (*p == ' ')
2412 	++p;
2413     return p;
2414 }
2415 
2416 /*
2417  * changed() is called when something in the current buffer is changed.
2418  *
2419  * Most often called through changed_bytes() and changed_lines(), which also
2420  * mark the area of the display to be redrawn.
2421  */
2422     void
2423 changed()
2424 {
2425 #if defined(FEAT_XIM) && defined(FEAT_GUI_GTK)
2426     /* The text of the preediting area is inserted, but this doesn't
2427      * mean a change of the buffer yet.  That is delayed until the
2428      * text is committed. (this means preedit becomes empty) */
2429     if (im_is_preediting() && !xim_changed_while_preediting)
2430 	return;
2431     xim_changed_while_preediting = FALSE;
2432 #endif
2433 
2434     if (!curbuf->b_changed)
2435     {
2436 	int	save_msg_scroll = msg_scroll;
2437 
2438 	/* Give a warning about changing a read-only file.  This may also
2439 	 * check-out the file, thus change "curbuf"! */
2440 	change_warning(0);
2441 
2442 	/* Create a swap file if that is wanted.
2443 	 * Don't do this for "nofile" and "nowrite" buffer types. */
2444 	if (curbuf->b_may_swap
2445 #ifdef FEAT_QUICKFIX
2446 		&& !bt_dontwrite(curbuf)
2447 #endif
2448 		)
2449 	{
2450 	    ml_open_file(curbuf);
2451 
2452 	    /* The ml_open_file() can cause an ATTENTION message.
2453 	     * Wait two seconds, to make sure the user reads this unexpected
2454 	     * message.  Since we could be anywhere, call wait_return() now,
2455 	     * and don't let the emsg() set msg_scroll. */
2456 	    if (need_wait_return && emsg_silent == 0)
2457 	    {
2458 		out_flush();
2459 		ui_delay(2000L, TRUE);
2460 		wait_return(TRUE);
2461 		msg_scroll = save_msg_scroll;
2462 	    }
2463 	}
2464 	curbuf->b_changed = TRUE;
2465 	ml_setflags(curbuf);
2466 #ifdef FEAT_WINDOWS
2467 	check_status(curbuf);
2468 	redraw_tabline = TRUE;
2469 #endif
2470 #ifdef FEAT_TITLE
2471 	need_maketitle = TRUE;	    /* set window title later */
2472 #endif
2473     }
2474     ++curbuf->b_changedtick;
2475 }
2476 
2477 static void changedOneline __ARGS((buf_T *buf, linenr_T lnum));
2478 static void changed_lines_buf __ARGS((buf_T *buf, linenr_T lnum, linenr_T lnume, long xtra));
2479 static void changed_common __ARGS((linenr_T lnum, colnr_T col, linenr_T lnume, long xtra));
2480 
2481 /*
2482  * Changed bytes within a single line for the current buffer.
2483  * - marks the windows on this buffer to be redisplayed
2484  * - marks the buffer changed by calling changed()
2485  * - invalidates cached values
2486  */
2487     void
2488 changed_bytes(lnum, col)
2489     linenr_T	lnum;
2490     colnr_T	col;
2491 {
2492     changedOneline(curbuf, lnum);
2493     changed_common(lnum, col, lnum + 1, 0L);
2494 
2495 #ifdef FEAT_DIFF
2496     /* Diff highlighting in other diff windows may need to be updated too. */
2497     if (curwin->w_p_diff)
2498     {
2499 	win_T	    *wp;
2500 	linenr_T    wlnum;
2501 
2502 	for (wp = firstwin; wp != NULL; wp = wp->w_next)
2503 	    if (wp->w_p_diff && wp != curwin)
2504 	    {
2505 		redraw_win_later(wp, VALID);
2506 		wlnum = diff_lnum_win(lnum, wp);
2507 		if (wlnum > 0)
2508 		    changedOneline(wp->w_buffer, wlnum);
2509 	    }
2510     }
2511 #endif
2512 }
2513 
2514     static void
2515 changedOneline(buf, lnum)
2516     buf_T	*buf;
2517     linenr_T	lnum;
2518 {
2519     if (buf->b_mod_set)
2520     {
2521 	/* find the maximum area that must be redisplayed */
2522 	if (lnum < buf->b_mod_top)
2523 	    buf->b_mod_top = lnum;
2524 	else if (lnum >= buf->b_mod_bot)
2525 	    buf->b_mod_bot = lnum + 1;
2526     }
2527     else
2528     {
2529 	/* set the area that must be redisplayed to one line */
2530 	buf->b_mod_set = TRUE;
2531 	buf->b_mod_top = lnum;
2532 	buf->b_mod_bot = lnum + 1;
2533 	buf->b_mod_xlines = 0;
2534     }
2535 }
2536 
2537 /*
2538  * Appended "count" lines below line "lnum" in the current buffer.
2539  * Must be called AFTER the change and after mark_adjust().
2540  * Takes care of marking the buffer to be redrawn and sets the changed flag.
2541  */
2542     void
2543 appended_lines(lnum, count)
2544     linenr_T	lnum;
2545     long	count;
2546 {
2547     changed_lines(lnum + 1, 0, lnum + 1, count);
2548 }
2549 
2550 /*
2551  * Like appended_lines(), but adjust marks first.
2552  */
2553     void
2554 appended_lines_mark(lnum, count)
2555     linenr_T	lnum;
2556     long	count;
2557 {
2558     mark_adjust(lnum + 1, (linenr_T)MAXLNUM, count, 0L);
2559     changed_lines(lnum + 1, 0, lnum + 1, count);
2560 }
2561 
2562 /*
2563  * Deleted "count" lines at line "lnum" in the current buffer.
2564  * Must be called AFTER the change and after mark_adjust().
2565  * Takes care of marking the buffer to be redrawn and sets the changed flag.
2566  */
2567     void
2568 deleted_lines(lnum, count)
2569     linenr_T	lnum;
2570     long	count;
2571 {
2572     changed_lines(lnum, 0, lnum + count, -count);
2573 }
2574 
2575 /*
2576  * Like deleted_lines(), but adjust marks first.
2577  */
2578     void
2579 deleted_lines_mark(lnum, count)
2580     linenr_T	lnum;
2581     long	count;
2582 {
2583     mark_adjust(lnum, (linenr_T)(lnum + count - 1), (long)MAXLNUM, -count);
2584     changed_lines(lnum, 0, lnum + count, -count);
2585 }
2586 
2587 /*
2588  * Changed lines for the current buffer.
2589  * Must be called AFTER the change and after mark_adjust().
2590  * - mark the buffer changed by calling changed()
2591  * - mark the windows on this buffer to be redisplayed
2592  * - invalidate cached values
2593  * "lnum" is the first line that needs displaying, "lnume" the first line
2594  * below the changed lines (BEFORE the change).
2595  * When only inserting lines, "lnum" and "lnume" are equal.
2596  * Takes care of calling changed() and updating b_mod_*.
2597  */
2598     void
2599 changed_lines(lnum, col, lnume, xtra)
2600     linenr_T	lnum;	    /* first line with change */
2601     colnr_T	col;	    /* column in first line with change */
2602     linenr_T	lnume;	    /* line below last changed line */
2603     long	xtra;	    /* number of extra lines (negative when deleting) */
2604 {
2605     changed_lines_buf(curbuf, lnum, lnume, xtra);
2606 
2607 #ifdef FEAT_DIFF
2608     if (xtra == 0 && curwin->w_p_diff)
2609     {
2610 	/* When the number of lines doesn't change then mark_adjust() isn't
2611 	 * called and other diff buffers still need to be marked for
2612 	 * displaying. */
2613 	win_T	    *wp;
2614 	linenr_T    wlnum;
2615 
2616 	for (wp = firstwin; wp != NULL; wp = wp->w_next)
2617 	    if (wp->w_p_diff && wp != curwin)
2618 	    {
2619 		redraw_win_later(wp, VALID);
2620 		wlnum = diff_lnum_win(lnum, wp);
2621 		if (wlnum > 0)
2622 		    changed_lines_buf(wp->w_buffer, wlnum,
2623 						    lnume - lnum + wlnum, 0L);
2624 	    }
2625     }
2626 #endif
2627 
2628     changed_common(lnum, col, lnume, xtra);
2629 }
2630 
2631     static void
2632 changed_lines_buf(buf, lnum, lnume, xtra)
2633     buf_T	*buf;
2634     linenr_T	lnum;	    /* first line with change */
2635     linenr_T	lnume;	    /* line below last changed line */
2636     long	xtra;	    /* number of extra lines (negative when deleting) */
2637 {
2638     if (buf->b_mod_set)
2639     {
2640 	/* find the maximum area that must be redisplayed */
2641 	if (lnum < buf->b_mod_top)
2642 	    buf->b_mod_top = lnum;
2643 	if (lnum < buf->b_mod_bot)
2644 	{
2645 	    /* adjust old bot position for xtra lines */
2646 	    buf->b_mod_bot += xtra;
2647 	    if (buf->b_mod_bot < lnum)
2648 		buf->b_mod_bot = lnum;
2649 	}
2650 	if (lnume + xtra > buf->b_mod_bot)
2651 	    buf->b_mod_bot = lnume + xtra;
2652 	buf->b_mod_xlines += xtra;
2653     }
2654     else
2655     {
2656 	/* set the area that must be redisplayed */
2657 	buf->b_mod_set = TRUE;
2658 	buf->b_mod_top = lnum;
2659 	buf->b_mod_bot = lnume + xtra;
2660 	buf->b_mod_xlines = xtra;
2661     }
2662 }
2663 
2664     static void
2665 changed_common(lnum, col, lnume, xtra)
2666     linenr_T	lnum;
2667     colnr_T	col;
2668     linenr_T	lnume;
2669     long	xtra;
2670 {
2671     win_T	*wp;
2672     int		i;
2673 #ifdef FEAT_JUMPLIST
2674     int		cols;
2675     pos_T	*p;
2676     int		add;
2677 #endif
2678 
2679     /* mark the buffer as modified */
2680     changed();
2681 
2682     /* set the '. mark */
2683     if (!cmdmod.keepjumps)
2684     {
2685 	curbuf->b_last_change.lnum = lnum;
2686 	curbuf->b_last_change.col = col;
2687 
2688 #ifdef FEAT_JUMPLIST
2689 	/* Create a new entry if a new undo-able change was started or we
2690 	 * don't have an entry yet. */
2691 	if (curbuf->b_new_change || curbuf->b_changelistlen == 0)
2692 	{
2693 	    if (curbuf->b_changelistlen == 0)
2694 		add = TRUE;
2695 	    else
2696 	    {
2697 		/* Don't create a new entry when the line number is the same
2698 		 * as the last one and the column is not too far away.  Avoids
2699 		 * creating many entries for typing "xxxxx". */
2700 		p = &curbuf->b_changelist[curbuf->b_changelistlen - 1];
2701 		if (p->lnum != lnum)
2702 		    add = TRUE;
2703 		else
2704 		{
2705 		    cols = comp_textwidth(FALSE);
2706 		    if (cols == 0)
2707 			cols = 79;
2708 		    add = (p->col + cols < col || col + cols < p->col);
2709 		}
2710 	    }
2711 	    if (add)
2712 	    {
2713 		/* This is the first of a new sequence of undo-able changes
2714 		 * and it's at some distance of the last change.  Use a new
2715 		 * position in the changelist. */
2716 		curbuf->b_new_change = FALSE;
2717 
2718 		if (curbuf->b_changelistlen == JUMPLISTSIZE)
2719 		{
2720 		    /* changelist is full: remove oldest entry */
2721 		    curbuf->b_changelistlen = JUMPLISTSIZE - 1;
2722 		    mch_memmove(curbuf->b_changelist, curbuf->b_changelist + 1,
2723 					  sizeof(pos_T) * (JUMPLISTSIZE - 1));
2724 		    FOR_ALL_WINDOWS(wp)
2725 		    {
2726 			/* Correct position in changelist for other windows on
2727 			 * this buffer. */
2728 			if (wp->w_buffer == curbuf && wp->w_changelistidx > 0)
2729 			    --wp->w_changelistidx;
2730 		    }
2731 		}
2732 		FOR_ALL_WINDOWS(wp)
2733 		{
2734 		    /* For other windows, if the position in the changelist is
2735 		     * at the end it stays at the end. */
2736 		    if (wp->w_buffer == curbuf
2737 			    && wp->w_changelistidx == curbuf->b_changelistlen)
2738 			++wp->w_changelistidx;
2739 		}
2740 		++curbuf->b_changelistlen;
2741 	    }
2742 	}
2743 	curbuf->b_changelist[curbuf->b_changelistlen - 1] =
2744 							curbuf->b_last_change;
2745 	/* The current window is always after the last change, so that "g,"
2746 	 * takes you back to it. */
2747 	curwin->w_changelistidx = curbuf->b_changelistlen;
2748 #endif
2749     }
2750 
2751     FOR_ALL_WINDOWS(wp)
2752     {
2753 	if (wp->w_buffer == curbuf)
2754 	{
2755 	    /* Mark this window to be redrawn later. */
2756 	    if (wp->w_redr_type < VALID)
2757 		wp->w_redr_type = VALID;
2758 
2759 	    /* Check if a change in the buffer has invalidated the cached
2760 	     * values for the cursor. */
2761 #ifdef FEAT_FOLDING
2762 	    /*
2763 	     * Update the folds for this window.  Can't postpone this, because
2764 	     * a following operator might work on the whole fold: ">>dd".
2765 	     */
2766 	    foldUpdate(wp, lnum, lnume + xtra - 1);
2767 
2768 	    /* The change may cause lines above or below the change to become
2769 	     * included in a fold.  Set lnum/lnume to the first/last line that
2770 	     * might be displayed differently.
2771 	     * Set w_cline_folded here as an efficient way to update it when
2772 	     * inserting lines just above a closed fold. */
2773 	    i = hasFoldingWin(wp, lnum, &lnum, NULL, FALSE, NULL);
2774 	    if (wp->w_cursor.lnum == lnum)
2775 		wp->w_cline_folded = i;
2776 	    i = hasFoldingWin(wp, lnume, NULL, &lnume, FALSE, NULL);
2777 	    if (wp->w_cursor.lnum == lnume)
2778 		wp->w_cline_folded = i;
2779 
2780 	    /* If the changed line is in a range of previously folded lines,
2781 	     * compare with the first line in that range. */
2782 	    if (wp->w_cursor.lnum <= lnum)
2783 	    {
2784 		i = find_wl_entry(wp, lnum);
2785 		if (i >= 0 && wp->w_cursor.lnum > wp->w_lines[i].wl_lnum)
2786 		    changed_line_abv_curs_win(wp);
2787 	    }
2788 #endif
2789 
2790 	    if (wp->w_cursor.lnum > lnum)
2791 		changed_line_abv_curs_win(wp);
2792 	    else if (wp->w_cursor.lnum == lnum && wp->w_cursor.col >= col)
2793 		changed_cline_bef_curs_win(wp);
2794 	    if (wp->w_botline >= lnum)
2795 	    {
2796 		/* Assume that botline doesn't change (inserted lines make
2797 		 * other lines scroll down below botline). */
2798 		approximate_botline_win(wp);
2799 	    }
2800 
2801 	    /* Check if any w_lines[] entries have become invalid.
2802 	     * For entries below the change: Correct the lnums for
2803 	     * inserted/deleted lines.  Makes it possible to stop displaying
2804 	     * after the change. */
2805 	    for (i = 0; i < wp->w_lines_valid; ++i)
2806 		if (wp->w_lines[i].wl_valid)
2807 		{
2808 		    if (wp->w_lines[i].wl_lnum >= lnum)
2809 		    {
2810 			if (wp->w_lines[i].wl_lnum < lnume)
2811 			{
2812 			    /* line included in change */
2813 			    wp->w_lines[i].wl_valid = FALSE;
2814 			}
2815 			else if (xtra != 0)
2816 			{
2817 			    /* line below change */
2818 			    wp->w_lines[i].wl_lnum += xtra;
2819 #ifdef FEAT_FOLDING
2820 			    wp->w_lines[i].wl_lastlnum += xtra;
2821 #endif
2822 			}
2823 		    }
2824 #ifdef FEAT_FOLDING
2825 		    else if (wp->w_lines[i].wl_lastlnum >= lnum)
2826 		    {
2827 			/* change somewhere inside this range of folded lines,
2828 			 * may need to be redrawn */
2829 			wp->w_lines[i].wl_valid = FALSE;
2830 		    }
2831 #endif
2832 		}
2833 	}
2834     }
2835 
2836     /* Call update_screen() later, which checks out what needs to be redrawn,
2837      * since it notices b_mod_set and then uses b_mod_*. */
2838     if (must_redraw < VALID)
2839 	must_redraw = VALID;
2840 
2841 #ifdef FEAT_AUTOCMD
2842     /* when the cursor line is changed always trigger CursorMoved */
2843     if (lnum <= curwin->w_cursor.lnum
2844 		 && lnume + (xtra < 0 ? -xtra : xtra) > curwin->w_cursor.lnum)
2845 	last_cursormoved.lnum = 0;
2846 #endif
2847 }
2848 
2849 /*
2850  * unchanged() is called when the changed flag must be reset for buffer 'buf'
2851  */
2852     void
2853 unchanged(buf, ff)
2854     buf_T	*buf;
2855     int		ff;	/* also reset 'fileformat' */
2856 {
2857     if (buf->b_changed || (ff && file_ff_differs(buf)))
2858     {
2859 	buf->b_changed = 0;
2860 	ml_setflags(buf);
2861 	if (ff)
2862 	    save_file_ff(buf);
2863 #ifdef FEAT_WINDOWS
2864 	check_status(buf);
2865 	redraw_tabline = TRUE;
2866 #endif
2867 #ifdef FEAT_TITLE
2868 	need_maketitle = TRUE;	    /* set window title later */
2869 #endif
2870     }
2871     ++buf->b_changedtick;
2872 #ifdef FEAT_NETBEANS_INTG
2873     netbeans_unmodified(buf);
2874 #endif
2875 }
2876 
2877 #if defined(FEAT_WINDOWS) || defined(PROTO)
2878 /*
2879  * check_status: called when the status bars for the buffer 'buf'
2880  *		 need to be updated
2881  */
2882     void
2883 check_status(buf)
2884     buf_T	*buf;
2885 {
2886     win_T	*wp;
2887 
2888     for (wp = firstwin; wp != NULL; wp = wp->w_next)
2889 	if (wp->w_buffer == buf && wp->w_status_height)
2890 	{
2891 	    wp->w_redr_status = TRUE;
2892 	    if (must_redraw < VALID)
2893 		must_redraw = VALID;
2894 	}
2895 }
2896 #endif
2897 
2898 /*
2899  * If the file is readonly, give a warning message with the first change.
2900  * Don't do this for autocommands.
2901  * Don't use emsg(), because it flushes the macro buffer.
2902  * If we have undone all changes b_changed will be FALSE, but "b_did_warn"
2903  * will be TRUE.
2904  */
2905     void
2906 change_warning(col)
2907     int	    col;		/* column for message; non-zero when in insert
2908 				   mode and 'showmode' is on */
2909 {
2910     if (curbuf->b_did_warn == FALSE
2911 	    && curbufIsChanged() == 0
2912 #ifdef FEAT_AUTOCMD
2913 	    && !autocmd_busy
2914 #endif
2915 	    && curbuf->b_p_ro)
2916     {
2917 #ifdef FEAT_AUTOCMD
2918 	++curbuf_lock;
2919 	apply_autocmds(EVENT_FILECHANGEDRO, NULL, NULL, FALSE, curbuf);
2920 	--curbuf_lock;
2921 	if (!curbuf->b_p_ro)
2922 	    return;
2923 #endif
2924 	/*
2925 	 * Do what msg() does, but with a column offset if the warning should
2926 	 * be after the mode message.
2927 	 */
2928 	msg_start();
2929 	if (msg_row == Rows - 1)
2930 	    msg_col = col;
2931 	msg_source(hl_attr(HLF_W));
2932 	MSG_PUTS_ATTR(_("W10: Warning: Changing a readonly file"),
2933 						   hl_attr(HLF_W) | MSG_HIST);
2934 	msg_clr_eos();
2935 	(void)msg_end();
2936 	if (msg_silent == 0 && !silent_mode)
2937 	{
2938 	    out_flush();
2939 	    ui_delay(1000L, TRUE); /* give the user time to think about it */
2940 	}
2941 	curbuf->b_did_warn = TRUE;
2942 	redraw_cmdline = FALSE;	/* don't redraw and erase the message */
2943 	if (msg_row < Rows - 1)
2944 	    showmode();
2945     }
2946 }
2947 
2948 /*
2949  * Ask for a reply from the user, a 'y' or a 'n'.
2950  * No other characters are accepted, the message is repeated until a valid
2951  * reply is entered or CTRL-C is hit.
2952  * If direct is TRUE, don't use vgetc() but ui_inchar(), don't get characters
2953  * from any buffers but directly from the user.
2954  *
2955  * return the 'y' or 'n'
2956  */
2957     int
2958 ask_yesno(str, direct)
2959     char_u  *str;
2960     int	    direct;
2961 {
2962     int	    r = ' ';
2963     int	    save_State = State;
2964 
2965     if (exiting)		/* put terminal in raw mode for this question */
2966 	settmode(TMODE_RAW);
2967     ++no_wait_return;
2968 #ifdef USE_ON_FLY_SCROLL
2969     dont_scroll = TRUE;		/* disallow scrolling here */
2970 #endif
2971     State = CONFIRM;		/* mouse behaves like with :confirm */
2972 #ifdef FEAT_MOUSE
2973     setmouse();			/* disables mouse for xterm */
2974 #endif
2975     ++no_mapping;
2976     ++allow_keys;		/* no mapping here, but recognize keys */
2977 
2978     while (r != 'y' && r != 'n')
2979     {
2980 	/* same highlighting as for wait_return */
2981 	smsg_attr(hl_attr(HLF_R), (char_u *)"%s (y/n)?", str);
2982 	if (direct)
2983 	    r = get_keystroke();
2984 	else
2985 	    r = safe_vgetc();
2986 	if (r == Ctrl_C || r == ESC)
2987 	    r = 'n';
2988 	msg_putchar(r);	    /* show what you typed */
2989 	out_flush();
2990     }
2991     --no_wait_return;
2992     State = save_State;
2993 #ifdef FEAT_MOUSE
2994     setmouse();
2995 #endif
2996     --no_mapping;
2997     --allow_keys;
2998 
2999     return r;
3000 }
3001 
3002 /*
3003  * Get a key stroke directly from the user.
3004  * Ignores mouse clicks and scrollbar events, except a click for the left
3005  * button (used at the more prompt).
3006  * Doesn't use vgetc(), because it syncs undo and eats mapped characters.
3007  * Disadvantage: typeahead is ignored.
3008  * Translates the interrupt character for unix to ESC.
3009  */
3010     int
3011 get_keystroke()
3012 {
3013 #define CBUFLEN 151
3014     char_u	buf[CBUFLEN];
3015     int		len = 0;
3016     int		n;
3017     int		save_mapped_ctrl_c = mapped_ctrl_c;
3018     int		waited = 0;
3019 
3020     mapped_ctrl_c = FALSE;	/* mappings are not used here */
3021     for (;;)
3022     {
3023 	cursor_on();
3024 	out_flush();
3025 
3026 	/* First time: blocking wait.  Second time: wait up to 100ms for a
3027 	 * terminal code to complete.  Leave some room for check_termcode() to
3028 	 * insert a key code into (max 5 chars plus NUL).  And
3029 	 * fix_input_buffer() can triple the number of bytes. */
3030 	n = ui_inchar(buf + len, (CBUFLEN - 6 - len) / 3,
3031 						    len == 0 ? -1L : 100L, 0);
3032 	if (n > 0)
3033 	{
3034 	    /* Replace zero and CSI by a special key code. */
3035 	    n = fix_input_buffer(buf + len, n, FALSE);
3036 	    len += n;
3037 	    waited = 0;
3038 	}
3039 	else if (len > 0)
3040 	    ++waited;	    /* keep track of the waiting time */
3041 
3042 	/* Incomplete termcode and not timed out yet: get more characters */
3043 	if ((n = check_termcode(1, buf, len)) < 0
3044 	       && (!p_ttimeout || waited * 100L < (p_ttm < 0 ? p_tm : p_ttm)))
3045 	    continue;
3046 
3047 	/* found a termcode: adjust length */
3048 	if (n > 0)
3049 	    len = n;
3050 	if (len == 0)	    /* nothing typed yet */
3051 	    continue;
3052 
3053 	/* Handle modifier and/or special key code. */
3054 	n = buf[0];
3055 	if (n == K_SPECIAL)
3056 	{
3057 	    n = TO_SPECIAL(buf[1], buf[2]);
3058 	    if (buf[1] == KS_MODIFIER
3059 		    || n == K_IGNORE
3060 #ifdef FEAT_MOUSE
3061 		    || n == K_LEFTMOUSE_NM
3062 		    || n == K_LEFTDRAG
3063 		    || n == K_LEFTRELEASE
3064 		    || n == K_LEFTRELEASE_NM
3065 		    || n == K_MIDDLEMOUSE
3066 		    || n == K_MIDDLEDRAG
3067 		    || n == K_MIDDLERELEASE
3068 		    || n == K_RIGHTMOUSE
3069 		    || n == K_RIGHTDRAG
3070 		    || n == K_RIGHTRELEASE
3071 		    || n == K_MOUSEDOWN
3072 		    || n == K_MOUSEUP
3073 		    || n == K_X1MOUSE
3074 		    || n == K_X1DRAG
3075 		    || n == K_X1RELEASE
3076 		    || n == K_X2MOUSE
3077 		    || n == K_X2DRAG
3078 		    || n == K_X2RELEASE
3079 # ifdef FEAT_GUI
3080 		    || n == K_VER_SCROLLBAR
3081 		    || n == K_HOR_SCROLLBAR
3082 # endif
3083 #endif
3084 	       )
3085 	    {
3086 		if (buf[1] == KS_MODIFIER)
3087 		    mod_mask = buf[2];
3088 		len -= 3;
3089 		if (len > 0)
3090 		    mch_memmove(buf, buf + 3, (size_t)len);
3091 		continue;
3092 	    }
3093 	    break;
3094 	}
3095 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
3096 	if (has_mbyte)
3097 	{
3098 	    if (MB_BYTE2LEN(n) > len)
3099 		continue;	/* more bytes to get */
3100 	    buf[len >= CBUFLEN ? CBUFLEN - 1 : len] = NUL;
3101 	    n = (*mb_ptr2char)(buf);
3102 	}
3103 #endif
3104 #ifdef UNIX
3105 	if (n == intr_char)
3106 	    n = ESC;
3107 #endif
3108 	break;
3109     }
3110 
3111     mapped_ctrl_c = save_mapped_ctrl_c;
3112     return n;
3113 }
3114 
3115 /*
3116  * Get a number from the user.
3117  * When "mouse_used" is not NULL allow using the mouse.
3118  */
3119     int
3120 get_number(colon, mouse_used)
3121     int	    colon;			/* allow colon to abort */
3122     int	    *mouse_used;
3123 {
3124     int	n = 0;
3125     int	c;
3126     int typed = 0;
3127 
3128     if (mouse_used != NULL)
3129 	*mouse_used = FALSE;
3130 
3131     /* When not printing messages, the user won't know what to type, return a
3132      * zero (as if CR was hit). */
3133     if (msg_silent != 0)
3134 	return 0;
3135 
3136 #ifdef USE_ON_FLY_SCROLL
3137     dont_scroll = TRUE;		/* disallow scrolling here */
3138 #endif
3139     ++no_mapping;
3140     ++allow_keys;		/* no mapping here, but recognize keys */
3141     for (;;)
3142     {
3143 	windgoto(msg_row, msg_col);
3144 	c = safe_vgetc();
3145 	if (VIM_ISDIGIT(c))
3146 	{
3147 	    n = n * 10 + c - '0';
3148 	    msg_putchar(c);
3149 	    ++typed;
3150 	}
3151 	else if (c == K_DEL || c == K_KDEL || c == K_BS || c == Ctrl_H)
3152 	{
3153 	    if (typed > 0)
3154 	    {
3155 		MSG_PUTS("\b \b");
3156 		--typed;
3157 	    }
3158 	    n /= 10;
3159 	}
3160 #ifdef FEAT_MOUSE
3161 	else if (mouse_used != NULL && c == K_LEFTMOUSE)
3162 	{
3163 	    *mouse_used = TRUE;
3164 	    n = mouse_row + 1;
3165 	    break;
3166 	}
3167 #endif
3168 	else if (n == 0 && c == ':' && colon)
3169 	{
3170 	    stuffcharReadbuff(':');
3171 	    if (!exmode_active)
3172 		cmdline_row = msg_row;
3173 	    skip_redraw = TRUE;	    /* skip redraw once */
3174 	    do_redraw = FALSE;
3175 	    break;
3176 	}
3177 	else if (c == CAR || c == NL || c == Ctrl_C || c == ESC)
3178 	    break;
3179     }
3180     --no_mapping;
3181     --allow_keys;
3182     return n;
3183 }
3184 
3185 /*
3186  * Ask the user to enter a number.
3187  * When "mouse_used" is not NULL allow using the mouse and in that case return
3188  * the line number.
3189  */
3190     int
3191 prompt_for_number(mouse_used)
3192     int		*mouse_used;
3193 {
3194     int		i;
3195     int		save_cmdline_row;
3196     int		save_State;
3197 
3198     /* When using ":silent" assume that <CR> was entered. */
3199     if (mouse_used != NULL)
3200 	MSG_PUTS(_("Type number or click with mouse (<Enter> cancels): "));
3201     else
3202 	MSG_PUTS(_("Choice number (<Enter> cancels): "));
3203 
3204     /* Set the state such that text can be selected/copied/pasted and we still
3205      * get mouse events. */
3206     save_cmdline_row = cmdline_row;
3207     cmdline_row = 0;
3208     save_State = State;
3209     State = CMDLINE;
3210 
3211     i = get_number(TRUE, mouse_used);
3212     if (KeyTyped)
3213     {
3214 	/* don't call wait_return() now */
3215 	/* msg_putchar('\n'); */
3216 	cmdline_row = msg_row - 1;
3217 	need_wait_return = FALSE;
3218 	msg_didany = FALSE;
3219     }
3220     else
3221 	cmdline_row = save_cmdline_row;
3222     State = save_State;
3223 
3224     return i;
3225 }
3226 
3227     void
3228 msgmore(n)
3229     long n;
3230 {
3231     long pn;
3232 
3233     if (global_busy	    /* no messages now, wait until global is finished */
3234 	    || !messaging())  /* 'lazyredraw' set, don't do messages now */
3235 	return;
3236 
3237     /* We don't want to overwrite another important message, but do overwrite
3238      * a previous "more lines" or "fewer lines" message, so that "5dd" and
3239      * then "put" reports the last action. */
3240     if (keep_msg != NULL && !keep_msg_more)
3241 	return;
3242 
3243     if (n > 0)
3244 	pn = n;
3245     else
3246 	pn = -n;
3247 
3248     if (pn > p_report)
3249     {
3250 	if (pn == 1)
3251 	{
3252 	    if (n > 0)
3253 		STRCPY(msg_buf, _("1 more line"));
3254 	    else
3255 		STRCPY(msg_buf, _("1 line less"));
3256 	}
3257 	else
3258 	{
3259 	    if (n > 0)
3260 		sprintf((char *)msg_buf, _("%ld more lines"), pn);
3261 	    else
3262 		sprintf((char *)msg_buf, _("%ld fewer lines"), pn);
3263 	}
3264 	if (got_int)
3265 	    STRCAT(msg_buf, _(" (Interrupted)"));
3266 	if (msg(msg_buf))
3267 	{
3268 	    set_keep_msg(msg_buf, 0);
3269 	    keep_msg_more = TRUE;
3270 	}
3271     }
3272 }
3273 
3274 /*
3275  * flush map and typeahead buffers and give a warning for an error
3276  */
3277     void
3278 beep_flush()
3279 {
3280     if (emsg_silent == 0)
3281     {
3282 	flush_buffers(FALSE);
3283 	vim_beep();
3284     }
3285 }
3286 
3287 /*
3288  * give a warning for an error
3289  */
3290     void
3291 vim_beep()
3292 {
3293     if (emsg_silent == 0)
3294     {
3295 	if (p_vb
3296 #ifdef FEAT_GUI
3297 		/* While the GUI is starting up the termcap is set for the GUI
3298 		 * but the output still goes to a terminal. */
3299 		&& !(gui.in_use && gui.starting)
3300 #endif
3301 		)
3302 	{
3303 	    out_str(T_VB);
3304 	}
3305 	else
3306 	{
3307 #ifdef MSDOS
3308 	    /*
3309 	     * The number of beeps outputted is reduced to avoid having to wait
3310 	     * for all the beeps to finish. This is only a problem on systems
3311 	     * where the beeps don't overlap.
3312 	     */
3313 	    if (beep_count == 0 || beep_count == 10)
3314 	    {
3315 		out_char(BELL);
3316 		beep_count = 1;
3317 	    }
3318 	    else
3319 		++beep_count;
3320 #else
3321 	    out_char(BELL);
3322 #endif
3323 	}
3324 
3325 	/* When 'verbose' is set and we are sourcing a script or executing a
3326 	 * function give the user a hint where the beep comes from. */
3327 	if (vim_strchr(p_debug, 'e') != NULL)
3328 	{
3329 	    msg_source(hl_attr(HLF_W));
3330 	    msg_attr((char_u *)_("Beep!"), hl_attr(HLF_W));
3331 	}
3332     }
3333 }
3334 
3335 /*
3336  * To get the "real" home directory:
3337  * - get value of $HOME
3338  * For Unix:
3339  *  - go to that directory
3340  *  - do mch_dirname() to get the real name of that directory.
3341  *  This also works with mounts and links.
3342  *  Don't do this for MS-DOS, it will change the "current dir" for a drive.
3343  */
3344 static char_u	*homedir = NULL;
3345 
3346     void
3347 init_homedir()
3348 {
3349     char_u  *var;
3350 
3351     /* In case we are called a second time (when 'encoding' changes). */
3352     vim_free(homedir);
3353     homedir = NULL;
3354 
3355 #ifdef VMS
3356     var = mch_getenv((char_u *)"SYS$LOGIN");
3357 #else
3358     var = mch_getenv((char_u *)"HOME");
3359 #endif
3360 
3361     if (var != NULL && *var == NUL)	/* empty is same as not set */
3362 	var = NULL;
3363 
3364 #ifdef WIN3264
3365     /*
3366      * Weird but true: $HOME may contain an indirect reference to another
3367      * variable, esp. "%USERPROFILE%".  Happens when $USERPROFILE isn't set
3368      * when $HOME is being set.
3369      */
3370     if (var != NULL && *var == '%')
3371     {
3372 	char_u	*p;
3373 	char_u	*exp;
3374 
3375 	p = vim_strchr(var + 1, '%');
3376 	if (p != NULL)
3377 	{
3378 	    vim_strncpy(NameBuff, var + 1, p - (var + 1));
3379 	    exp = mch_getenv(NameBuff);
3380 	    if (exp != NULL && *exp != NUL
3381 					&& STRLEN(exp) + STRLEN(p) < MAXPATHL)
3382 	    {
3383 		vim_snprintf((char *)NameBuff, MAXPATHL, "%s%s", exp, p + 1);
3384 		var = NameBuff;
3385 		/* Also set $HOME, it's needed for _viminfo. */
3386 		vim_setenv((char_u *)"HOME", NameBuff);
3387 	    }
3388 	}
3389     }
3390 
3391     /*
3392      * Typically, $HOME is not defined on Windows, unless the user has
3393      * specifically defined it for Vim's sake.  However, on Windows NT
3394      * platforms, $HOMEDRIVE and $HOMEPATH are automatically defined for
3395      * each user.  Try constructing $HOME from these.
3396      */
3397     if (var == NULL)
3398     {
3399 	char_u *homedrive, *homepath;
3400 
3401 	homedrive = mch_getenv((char_u *)"HOMEDRIVE");
3402 	homepath = mch_getenv((char_u *)"HOMEPATH");
3403 	if (homedrive != NULL && homepath != NULL
3404 			   && STRLEN(homedrive) + STRLEN(homepath) < MAXPATHL)
3405 	{
3406 	    sprintf((char *)NameBuff, "%s%s", homedrive, homepath);
3407 	    if (NameBuff[0] != NUL)
3408 	    {
3409 		var = NameBuff;
3410 		/* Also set $HOME, it's needed for _viminfo. */
3411 		vim_setenv((char_u *)"HOME", NameBuff);
3412 	    }
3413 	}
3414     }
3415 
3416 # if defined(FEAT_MBYTE)
3417     if (enc_utf8 && var != NULL)
3418     {
3419 	int	len;
3420 	char_u  *pp;
3421 
3422 	/* Convert from active codepage to UTF-8.  Other conversions are
3423 	 * not done, because they would fail for non-ASCII characters. */
3424 	acp_to_enc(var, (int)STRLEN(var), &pp, &len);
3425 	if (pp != NULL)
3426 	{
3427 	    homedir = pp;
3428 	    return;
3429 	}
3430     }
3431 # endif
3432 #endif
3433 
3434 #if defined(OS2) || defined(MSDOS) || defined(MSWIN)
3435     /*
3436      * Default home dir is C:/
3437      * Best assumption we can make in such a situation.
3438      */
3439     if (var == NULL)
3440 	var = "C:/";
3441 #endif
3442     if (var != NULL)
3443     {
3444 #ifdef UNIX
3445 	/*
3446 	 * Change to the directory and get the actual path.  This resolves
3447 	 * links.  Don't do it when we can't return.
3448 	 */
3449 	if (mch_dirname(NameBuff, MAXPATHL) == OK
3450 					  && mch_chdir((char *)NameBuff) == 0)
3451 	{
3452 	    if (!mch_chdir((char *)var) && mch_dirname(IObuff, IOSIZE) == OK)
3453 		var = IObuff;
3454 	    if (mch_chdir((char *)NameBuff) != 0)
3455 		EMSG(_(e_prev_dir));
3456 	}
3457 #endif
3458 	homedir = vim_strsave(var);
3459     }
3460 }
3461 
3462 #if defined(EXITFREE) || defined(PROTO)
3463     void
3464 free_homedir()
3465 {
3466     vim_free(homedir);
3467 }
3468 #endif
3469 
3470 /*
3471  * Expand environment variable with path name.
3472  * "~/" is also expanded, using $HOME.	For Unix "~user/" is expanded.
3473  * Skips over "\ ", "\~" and "\$".
3474  * If anything fails no expansion is done and dst equals src.
3475  */
3476     void
3477 expand_env(src, dst, dstlen)
3478     char_u	*src;		/* input string e.g. "$HOME/vim.hlp" */
3479     char_u	*dst;		/* where to put the result */
3480     int		dstlen;		/* maximum length of the result */
3481 {
3482     expand_env_esc(src, dst, dstlen, FALSE, NULL);
3483 }
3484 
3485     void
3486 expand_env_esc(srcp, dst, dstlen, esc, startstr)
3487     char_u	*srcp;		/* input string e.g. "$HOME/vim.hlp" */
3488     char_u	*dst;		/* where to put the result */
3489     int		dstlen;		/* maximum length of the result */
3490     int		esc;		/* escape spaces in expanded variables */
3491     char_u	*startstr;	/* start again after this (can be NULL) */
3492 {
3493     char_u	*src;
3494     char_u	*tail;
3495     int		c;
3496     char_u	*var;
3497     int		copy_char;
3498     int		mustfree;	/* var was allocated, need to free it later */
3499     int		at_start = TRUE; /* at start of a name */
3500     int		startstr_len = 0;
3501 
3502     if (startstr != NULL)
3503 	startstr_len = (int)STRLEN(startstr);
3504 
3505     src = skipwhite(srcp);
3506     --dstlen;		    /* leave one char space for "\," */
3507     while (*src && dstlen > 0)
3508     {
3509 	copy_char = TRUE;
3510 	if ((*src == '$'
3511 #ifdef VMS
3512 		    && at_start
3513 #endif
3514 	   )
3515 #if defined(MSDOS) || defined(MSWIN) || defined(OS2)
3516 		|| *src == '%'
3517 #endif
3518 		|| (*src == '~' && at_start))
3519 	{
3520 	    mustfree = FALSE;
3521 
3522 	    /*
3523 	     * The variable name is copied into dst temporarily, because it may
3524 	     * be a string in read-only memory and a NUL needs to be appended.
3525 	     */
3526 	    if (*src != '~')				/* environment var */
3527 	    {
3528 		tail = src + 1;
3529 		var = dst;
3530 		c = dstlen - 1;
3531 
3532 #ifdef UNIX
3533 		/* Unix has ${var-name} type environment vars */
3534 		if (*tail == '{' && !vim_isIDc('{'))
3535 		{
3536 		    tail++;	/* ignore '{' */
3537 		    while (c-- > 0 && *tail && *tail != '}')
3538 			*var++ = *tail++;
3539 		}
3540 		else
3541 #endif
3542 		{
3543 		    while (c-- > 0 && *tail != NUL && ((vim_isIDc(*tail))
3544 #if defined(MSDOS) || defined(MSWIN) || defined(OS2)
3545 			    || (*src == '%' && *tail != '%')
3546 #endif
3547 			    ))
3548 		    {
3549 #ifdef OS2		/* env vars only in uppercase */
3550 			*var++ = TOUPPER_LOC(*tail);
3551 			tail++;	    /* toupper() may be a macro! */
3552 #else
3553 			*var++ = *tail++;
3554 #endif
3555 		    }
3556 		}
3557 
3558 #if defined(MSDOS) || defined(MSWIN) || defined(OS2) || defined(UNIX)
3559 # ifdef UNIX
3560 		if (src[1] == '{' && *tail != '}')
3561 # else
3562 		if (*src == '%' && *tail != '%')
3563 # endif
3564 		    var = NULL;
3565 		else
3566 		{
3567 # ifdef UNIX
3568 		    if (src[1] == '{')
3569 # else
3570 		    if (*src == '%')
3571 #endif
3572 			++tail;
3573 #endif
3574 		    *var = NUL;
3575 		    var = vim_getenv(dst, &mustfree);
3576 #if defined(MSDOS) || defined(MSWIN) || defined(OS2) || defined(UNIX)
3577 		}
3578 #endif
3579 	    }
3580 							/* home directory */
3581 	    else if (  src[1] == NUL
3582 		    || vim_ispathsep(src[1])
3583 		    || vim_strchr((char_u *)" ,\t\n", src[1]) != NULL)
3584 	    {
3585 		var = homedir;
3586 		tail = src + 1;
3587 	    }
3588 	    else					/* user directory */
3589 	    {
3590 #if defined(UNIX) || (defined(VMS) && defined(USER_HOME))
3591 		/*
3592 		 * Copy ~user to dst[], so we can put a NUL after it.
3593 		 */
3594 		tail = src;
3595 		var = dst;
3596 		c = dstlen - 1;
3597 		while (	   c-- > 0
3598 			&& *tail
3599 			&& vim_isfilec(*tail)
3600 			&& !vim_ispathsep(*tail))
3601 		    *var++ = *tail++;
3602 		*var = NUL;
3603 # ifdef UNIX
3604 		/*
3605 		 * If the system supports getpwnam(), use it.
3606 		 * Otherwise, or if getpwnam() fails, the shell is used to
3607 		 * expand ~user.  This is slower and may fail if the shell
3608 		 * does not support ~user (old versions of /bin/sh).
3609 		 */
3610 #  if defined(HAVE_GETPWNAM) && defined(HAVE_PWD_H)
3611 		{
3612 		    struct passwd *pw;
3613 
3614 		    /* Note: memory allocated by getpwnam() is never freed.
3615 		     * Calling endpwent() apparently doesn't help. */
3616 		    pw = getpwnam((char *)dst + 1);
3617 		    if (pw != NULL)
3618 			var = (char_u *)pw->pw_dir;
3619 		    else
3620 			var = NULL;
3621 		}
3622 		if (var == NULL)
3623 #  endif
3624 		{
3625 		    expand_T	xpc;
3626 
3627 		    ExpandInit(&xpc);
3628 		    xpc.xp_context = EXPAND_FILES;
3629 		    var = ExpandOne(&xpc, dst, NULL,
3630 				WILD_ADD_SLASH|WILD_SILENT, WILD_EXPAND_FREE);
3631 		    mustfree = TRUE;
3632 		}
3633 
3634 # else	/* !UNIX, thus VMS */
3635 		/*
3636 		 * USER_HOME is a comma-separated list of
3637 		 * directories to search for the user account in.
3638 		 */
3639 		{
3640 		    char_u	test[MAXPATHL], paths[MAXPATHL];
3641 		    char_u	*path, *next_path, *ptr;
3642 		    struct stat	st;
3643 
3644 		    STRCPY(paths, USER_HOME);
3645 		    next_path = paths;
3646 		    while (*next_path)
3647 		    {
3648 			for (path = next_path; *next_path && *next_path != ',';
3649 				next_path++);
3650 			if (*next_path)
3651 			    *next_path++ = NUL;
3652 			STRCPY(test, path);
3653 			STRCAT(test, "/");
3654 			STRCAT(test, dst + 1);
3655 			if (mch_stat(test, &st) == 0)
3656 			{
3657 			    var = alloc(STRLEN(test) + 1);
3658 			    STRCPY(var, test);
3659 			    mustfree = TRUE;
3660 			    break;
3661 			}
3662 		    }
3663 		}
3664 # endif /* UNIX */
3665 #else
3666 		/* cannot expand user's home directory, so don't try */
3667 		var = NULL;
3668 		tail = (char_u *)"";	/* for gcc */
3669 #endif /* UNIX || VMS */
3670 	    }
3671 
3672 #ifdef BACKSLASH_IN_FILENAME
3673 	    /* If 'shellslash' is set change backslashes to forward slashes.
3674 	     * Can't use slash_adjust(), p_ssl may be set temporarily. */
3675 	    if (p_ssl && var != NULL && vim_strchr(var, '\\') != NULL)
3676 	    {
3677 		char_u	*p = vim_strsave(var);
3678 
3679 		if (p != NULL)
3680 		{
3681 		    if (mustfree)
3682 			vim_free(var);
3683 		    var = p;
3684 		    mustfree = TRUE;
3685 		    forward_slash(var);
3686 		}
3687 	    }
3688 #endif
3689 
3690 	    /* If "var" contains white space, escape it with a backslash.
3691 	     * Required for ":e ~/tt" when $HOME includes a space. */
3692 	    if (esc && var != NULL && vim_strpbrk(var, (char_u *)" \t") != NULL)
3693 	    {
3694 		char_u	*p = vim_strsave_escaped(var, (char_u *)" \t");
3695 
3696 		if (p != NULL)
3697 		{
3698 		    if (mustfree)
3699 			vim_free(var);
3700 		    var = p;
3701 		    mustfree = TRUE;
3702 		}
3703 	    }
3704 
3705 	    if (var != NULL && *var != NUL
3706 		    && (STRLEN(var) + STRLEN(tail) + 1 < (unsigned)dstlen))
3707 	    {
3708 		STRCPY(dst, var);
3709 		dstlen -= (int)STRLEN(var);
3710 		c = (int)STRLEN(var);
3711 		/* if var[] ends in a path separator and tail[] starts
3712 		 * with it, skip a character */
3713 		if (*var != NUL && after_pathsep(dst, dst + c)
3714 #if defined(BACKSLASH_IN_FILENAME) || defined(AMIGA)
3715 			&& dst[-1] != ':'
3716 #endif
3717 			&& vim_ispathsep(*tail))
3718 		    ++tail;
3719 		dst += c;
3720 		src = tail;
3721 		copy_char = FALSE;
3722 	    }
3723 	    if (mustfree)
3724 		vim_free(var);
3725 	}
3726 
3727 	if (copy_char)	    /* copy at least one char */
3728 	{
3729 	    /*
3730 	     * Recogize the start of a new name, for '~'.
3731 	     */
3732 	    at_start = FALSE;
3733 	    if (src[0] == '\\' && src[1] != NUL)
3734 	    {
3735 		*dst++ = *src++;
3736 		--dstlen;
3737 	    }
3738 	    else if (src[0] == ' ' || src[0] == ',')
3739 		at_start = TRUE;
3740 	    *dst++ = *src++;
3741 	    --dstlen;
3742 
3743 	    if (startstr != NULL && src - startstr_len >= srcp
3744 		    && STRNCMP(src - startstr_len, startstr, startstr_len) == 0)
3745 		at_start = TRUE;
3746 	}
3747     }
3748     *dst = NUL;
3749 }
3750 
3751 /*
3752  * Vim's version of getenv().
3753  * Special handling of $HOME, $VIM and $VIMRUNTIME.
3754  * Also does ACP to 'enc' conversion for Win32.
3755  */
3756     char_u *
3757 vim_getenv(name, mustfree)
3758     char_u	*name;
3759     int		*mustfree;	/* set to TRUE when returned is allocated */
3760 {
3761     char_u	*p;
3762     char_u	*pend;
3763     int		vimruntime;
3764 
3765 #if defined(OS2) || defined(MSDOS) || defined(MSWIN)
3766     /* use "C:/" when $HOME is not set */
3767     if (STRCMP(name, "HOME") == 0)
3768 	return homedir;
3769 #endif
3770 
3771     p = mch_getenv(name);
3772     if (p != NULL && *p == NUL)	    /* empty is the same as not set */
3773 	p = NULL;
3774 
3775     if (p != NULL)
3776     {
3777 #if defined(FEAT_MBYTE) && defined(WIN3264)
3778 	if (enc_utf8)
3779 	{
3780 	    int	    len;
3781 	    char_u  *pp;
3782 
3783 	    /* Convert from active codepage to UTF-8.  Other conversions are
3784 	     * not done, because they would fail for non-ASCII characters. */
3785 	    acp_to_enc(p, (int)STRLEN(p), &pp, &len);
3786 	    if (pp != NULL)
3787 	    {
3788 		p = pp;
3789 		*mustfree = TRUE;
3790 	    }
3791 	}
3792 #endif
3793 	return p;
3794     }
3795 
3796     vimruntime = (STRCMP(name, "VIMRUNTIME") == 0);
3797     if (!vimruntime && STRCMP(name, "VIM") != 0)
3798 	return NULL;
3799 
3800     /*
3801      * When expanding $VIMRUNTIME fails, try using $VIM/vim<version> or $VIM.
3802      * Don't do this when default_vimruntime_dir is non-empty.
3803      */
3804     if (vimruntime
3805 #ifdef HAVE_PATHDEF
3806 	    && *default_vimruntime_dir == NUL
3807 #endif
3808        )
3809     {
3810 	p = mch_getenv((char_u *)"VIM");
3811 	if (p != NULL && *p == NUL)	    /* empty is the same as not set */
3812 	    p = NULL;
3813 	if (p != NULL)
3814 	{
3815 	    p = vim_version_dir(p);
3816 	    if (p != NULL)
3817 		*mustfree = TRUE;
3818 	    else
3819 		p = mch_getenv((char_u *)"VIM");
3820 
3821 #if defined(FEAT_MBYTE) && defined(WIN3264)
3822 	    if (enc_utf8)
3823 	    {
3824 		int	len;
3825 		char_u  *pp;
3826 
3827 		/* Convert from active codepage to UTF-8.  Other conversions
3828 		 * are not done, because they would fail for non-ASCII
3829 		 * characters. */
3830 		acp_to_enc(p, (int)STRLEN(p), &pp, &len);
3831 		if (pp != NULL)
3832 		{
3833 		    if (mustfree)
3834 			vim_free(p);
3835 		    p = pp;
3836 		    *mustfree = TRUE;
3837 		}
3838 	    }
3839 #endif
3840 	}
3841     }
3842 
3843     /*
3844      * When expanding $VIM or $VIMRUNTIME fails, try using:
3845      * - the directory name from 'helpfile' (unless it contains '$')
3846      * - the executable name from argv[0]
3847      */
3848     if (p == NULL)
3849     {
3850 	if (p_hf != NULL && vim_strchr(p_hf, '$') == NULL)
3851 	    p = p_hf;
3852 #ifdef USE_EXE_NAME
3853 	/*
3854 	 * Use the name of the executable, obtained from argv[0].
3855 	 */
3856 	else
3857 	    p = exe_name;
3858 #endif
3859 	if (p != NULL)
3860 	{
3861 	    /* remove the file name */
3862 	    pend = gettail(p);
3863 
3864 	    /* remove "doc/" from 'helpfile', if present */
3865 	    if (p == p_hf)
3866 		pend = remove_tail(p, pend, (char_u *)"doc");
3867 
3868 #ifdef USE_EXE_NAME
3869 # ifdef MACOS_X
3870 	    /* remove "MacOS" from exe_name and add "Resources/vim" */
3871 	    if (p == exe_name)
3872 	    {
3873 		char_u	*pend1;
3874 		char_u	*pnew;
3875 
3876 		pend1 = remove_tail(p, pend, (char_u *)"MacOS");
3877 		if (pend1 != pend)
3878 		{
3879 		    pnew = alloc((unsigned)(pend1 - p) + 15);
3880 		    if (pnew != NULL)
3881 		    {
3882 			STRNCPY(pnew, p, (pend1 - p));
3883 			STRCPY(pnew + (pend1 - p), "Resources/vim");
3884 			p = pnew;
3885 			pend = p + STRLEN(p);
3886 		    }
3887 		}
3888 	    }
3889 # endif
3890 	    /* remove "src/" from exe_name, if present */
3891 	    if (p == exe_name)
3892 		pend = remove_tail(p, pend, (char_u *)"src");
3893 #endif
3894 
3895 	    /* for $VIM, remove "runtime/" or "vim54/", if present */
3896 	    if (!vimruntime)
3897 	    {
3898 		pend = remove_tail(p, pend, (char_u *)RUNTIME_DIRNAME);
3899 		pend = remove_tail(p, pend, (char_u *)VIM_VERSION_NODOT);
3900 	    }
3901 
3902 	    /* remove trailing path separator */
3903 #ifndef MACOS_CLASSIC
3904 	    /* With MacOS path (with  colons) the final colon is required */
3905 	    /* to avoid confusion between absoulute and relative path */
3906 	    if (pend > p && after_pathsep(p, pend))
3907 		--pend;
3908 #endif
3909 
3910 #ifdef MACOS_X
3911 	    if (p == exe_name || p == p_hf)
3912 #endif
3913 		/* check that the result is a directory name */
3914 		p = vim_strnsave(p, (int)(pend - p));
3915 
3916 	    if (p != NULL && !mch_isdir(p))
3917 	    {
3918 		vim_free(p);
3919 		p = NULL;
3920 	    }
3921 	    else
3922 	    {
3923 #ifdef USE_EXE_NAME
3924 		/* may add "/vim54" or "/runtime" if it exists */
3925 		if (vimruntime && (pend = vim_version_dir(p)) != NULL)
3926 		{
3927 		    vim_free(p);
3928 		    p = pend;
3929 		}
3930 #endif
3931 		*mustfree = TRUE;
3932 	    }
3933 	}
3934     }
3935 
3936 #ifdef HAVE_PATHDEF
3937     /* When there is a pathdef.c file we can use default_vim_dir and
3938      * default_vimruntime_dir */
3939     if (p == NULL)
3940     {
3941 	/* Only use default_vimruntime_dir when it is not empty */
3942 	if (vimruntime && *default_vimruntime_dir != NUL)
3943 	{
3944 	    p = default_vimruntime_dir;
3945 	    *mustfree = FALSE;
3946 	}
3947 	else if (*default_vim_dir != NUL)
3948 	{
3949 	    if (vimruntime && (p = vim_version_dir(default_vim_dir)) != NULL)
3950 		*mustfree = TRUE;
3951 	    else
3952 	    {
3953 		p = default_vim_dir;
3954 		*mustfree = FALSE;
3955 	    }
3956 	}
3957     }
3958 #endif
3959 
3960     /*
3961      * Set the environment variable, so that the new value can be found fast
3962      * next time, and others can also use it (e.g. Perl).
3963      */
3964     if (p != NULL)
3965     {
3966 	if (vimruntime)
3967 	{
3968 	    vim_setenv((char_u *)"VIMRUNTIME", p);
3969 	    didset_vimruntime = TRUE;
3970 #ifdef FEAT_GETTEXT
3971 	    {
3972 		char_u	*buf = concat_str(p, (char_u *)"/lang");
3973 
3974 		if (buf != NULL)
3975 		{
3976 		    bindtextdomain(VIMPACKAGE, (char *)buf);
3977 		    vim_free(buf);
3978 		}
3979 	    }
3980 #endif
3981 	}
3982 	else
3983 	{
3984 	    vim_setenv((char_u *)"VIM", p);
3985 	    didset_vim = TRUE;
3986 	}
3987     }
3988     return p;
3989 }
3990 
3991 /*
3992  * Check if the directory "vimdir/<version>" or "vimdir/runtime" exists.
3993  * Return NULL if not, return its name in allocated memory otherwise.
3994  */
3995     static char_u *
3996 vim_version_dir(vimdir)
3997     char_u	*vimdir;
3998 {
3999     char_u	*p;
4000 
4001     if (vimdir == NULL || *vimdir == NUL)
4002 	return NULL;
4003     p = concat_fnames(vimdir, (char_u *)VIM_VERSION_NODOT, TRUE);
4004     if (p != NULL && mch_isdir(p))
4005 	return p;
4006     vim_free(p);
4007     p = concat_fnames(vimdir, (char_u *)RUNTIME_DIRNAME, TRUE);
4008     if (p != NULL && mch_isdir(p))
4009 	return p;
4010     vim_free(p);
4011     return NULL;
4012 }
4013 
4014 /*
4015  * If the string between "p" and "pend" ends in "name/", return "pend" minus
4016  * the length of "name/".  Otherwise return "pend".
4017  */
4018     static char_u *
4019 remove_tail(p, pend, name)
4020     char_u	*p;
4021     char_u	*pend;
4022     char_u	*name;
4023 {
4024     int		len = (int)STRLEN(name) + 1;
4025     char_u	*newend = pend - len;
4026 
4027     if (newend >= p
4028 	    && fnamencmp(newend, name, len - 1) == 0
4029 	    && (newend == p || after_pathsep(p, newend)))
4030 	return newend;
4031     return pend;
4032 }
4033 
4034 /*
4035  * Call expand_env() and store the result in an allocated string.
4036  * This is not very memory efficient, this expects the result to be freed
4037  * again soon.
4038  */
4039     char_u *
4040 expand_env_save(src)
4041     char_u	*src;
4042 {
4043     char_u	*p;
4044 
4045     p = alloc(MAXPATHL);
4046     if (p != NULL)
4047 	expand_env(src, p, MAXPATHL);
4048     return p;
4049 }
4050 
4051 /*
4052  * Our portable version of setenv.
4053  */
4054     void
4055 vim_setenv(name, val)
4056     char_u	*name;
4057     char_u	*val;
4058 {
4059 #ifdef HAVE_SETENV
4060     mch_setenv((char *)name, (char *)val, 1);
4061 #else
4062     char_u	*envbuf;
4063 
4064     /*
4065      * Putenv does not copy the string, it has to remain
4066      * valid.  The allocated memory will never be freed.
4067      */
4068     envbuf = alloc((unsigned)(STRLEN(name) + STRLEN(val) + 2));
4069     if (envbuf != NULL)
4070     {
4071 	sprintf((char *)envbuf, "%s=%s", name, val);
4072 	putenv((char *)envbuf);
4073     }
4074 #endif
4075 }
4076 
4077 #if defined(FEAT_CMDL_COMPL) || defined(PROTO)
4078 /*
4079  * Function given to ExpandGeneric() to obtain an environment variable name.
4080  */
4081 /*ARGSUSED*/
4082     char_u *
4083 get_env_name(xp, idx)
4084     expand_T	*xp;
4085     int		idx;
4086 {
4087 # if defined(AMIGA) || defined(__MRC__) || defined(__SC__)
4088     /*
4089      * No environ[] on the Amiga and on the Mac (using MPW).
4090      */
4091     return NULL;
4092 # else
4093 # ifndef __WIN32__
4094     /* Borland C++ 5.2 has this in a header file. */
4095     extern char		**environ;
4096 # endif
4097 # define ENVNAMELEN 100
4098     static char_u	name[ENVNAMELEN];
4099     char_u		*str;
4100     int			n;
4101 
4102     str = (char_u *)environ[idx];
4103     if (str == NULL)
4104 	return NULL;
4105 
4106     for (n = 0; n < ENVNAMELEN - 1; ++n)
4107     {
4108 	if (str[n] == '=' || str[n] == NUL)
4109 	    break;
4110 	name[n] = str[n];
4111     }
4112     name[n] = NUL;
4113     return name;
4114 # endif
4115 }
4116 #endif
4117 
4118 /*
4119  * Replace home directory by "~" in each space or comma separated file name in
4120  * 'src'.
4121  * If anything fails (except when out of space) dst equals src.
4122  */
4123     void
4124 home_replace(buf, src, dst, dstlen, one)
4125     buf_T	*buf;	/* when not NULL, check for help files */
4126     char_u	*src;	/* input file name */
4127     char_u	*dst;	/* where to put the result */
4128     int		dstlen;	/* maximum length of the result */
4129     int		one;	/* if TRUE, only replace one file name, include
4130 			   spaces and commas in the file name. */
4131 {
4132     size_t	dirlen = 0, envlen = 0;
4133     size_t	len;
4134     char_u	*homedir_env;
4135     char_u	*p;
4136 
4137     if (src == NULL)
4138     {
4139 	*dst = NUL;
4140 	return;
4141     }
4142 
4143     /*
4144      * If the file is a help file, remove the path completely.
4145      */
4146     if (buf != NULL && buf->b_help)
4147     {
4148 	STRCPY(dst, gettail(src));
4149 	return;
4150     }
4151 
4152     /*
4153      * We check both the value of the $HOME environment variable and the
4154      * "real" home directory.
4155      */
4156     if (homedir != NULL)
4157 	dirlen = STRLEN(homedir);
4158 
4159 #ifdef VMS
4160     homedir_env = mch_getenv((char_u *)"SYS$LOGIN");
4161 #else
4162     homedir_env = mch_getenv((char_u *)"HOME");
4163 #endif
4164 
4165     if (homedir_env != NULL && *homedir_env == NUL)
4166 	homedir_env = NULL;
4167     if (homedir_env != NULL)
4168 	envlen = STRLEN(homedir_env);
4169 
4170     if (!one)
4171 	src = skipwhite(src);
4172     while (*src && dstlen > 0)
4173     {
4174 	/*
4175 	 * Here we are at the beginning of a file name.
4176 	 * First, check to see if the beginning of the file name matches
4177 	 * $HOME or the "real" home directory. Check that there is a '/'
4178 	 * after the match (so that if e.g. the file is "/home/pieter/bla",
4179 	 * and the home directory is "/home/piet", the file does not end up
4180 	 * as "~er/bla" (which would seem to indicate the file "bla" in user
4181 	 * er's home directory)).
4182 	 */
4183 	p = homedir;
4184 	len = dirlen;
4185 	for (;;)
4186 	{
4187 	    if (   len
4188 		&& fnamencmp(src, p, len) == 0
4189 		&& (vim_ispathsep(src[len])
4190 		    || (!one && (src[len] == ',' || src[len] == ' '))
4191 		    || src[len] == NUL))
4192 	    {
4193 		src += len;
4194 		if (--dstlen > 0)
4195 		    *dst++ = '~';
4196 
4197 		/*
4198 		 * If it's just the home directory, add  "/".
4199 		 */
4200 		if (!vim_ispathsep(src[0]) && --dstlen > 0)
4201 		    *dst++ = '/';
4202 		break;
4203 	    }
4204 	    if (p == homedir_env)
4205 		break;
4206 	    p = homedir_env;
4207 	    len = envlen;
4208 	}
4209 
4210 	/* if (!one) skip to separator: space or comma */
4211 	while (*src && (one || (*src != ',' && *src != ' ')) && --dstlen > 0)
4212 	    *dst++ = *src++;
4213 	/* skip separator */
4214 	while ((*src == ' ' || *src == ',') && --dstlen > 0)
4215 	    *dst++ = *src++;
4216     }
4217     /* if (dstlen == 0) out of space, what to do??? */
4218 
4219     *dst = NUL;
4220 }
4221 
4222 /*
4223  * Like home_replace, store the replaced string in allocated memory.
4224  * When something fails, NULL is returned.
4225  */
4226     char_u  *
4227 home_replace_save(buf, src)
4228     buf_T	*buf;	/* when not NULL, check for help files */
4229     char_u	*src;	/* input file name */
4230 {
4231     char_u	*dst;
4232     unsigned	len;
4233 
4234     len = 3;			/* space for "~/" and trailing NUL */
4235     if (src != NULL)		/* just in case */
4236 	len += (unsigned)STRLEN(src);
4237     dst = alloc(len);
4238     if (dst != NULL)
4239 	home_replace(buf, src, dst, len, TRUE);
4240     return dst;
4241 }
4242 
4243 /*
4244  * Compare two file names and return:
4245  * FPC_SAME   if they both exist and are the same file.
4246  * FPC_SAMEX  if they both don't exist and have the same file name.
4247  * FPC_DIFF   if they both exist and are different files.
4248  * FPC_NOTX   if they both don't exist.
4249  * FPC_DIFFX  if one of them doesn't exist.
4250  * For the first name environment variables are expanded
4251  */
4252     int
4253 fullpathcmp(s1, s2, checkname)
4254     char_u *s1, *s2;
4255     int	    checkname;		/* when both don't exist, check file names */
4256 {
4257 #ifdef UNIX
4258     char_u	    exp1[MAXPATHL];
4259     char_u	    full1[MAXPATHL];
4260     char_u	    full2[MAXPATHL];
4261     struct stat	    st1, st2;
4262     int		    r1, r2;
4263 
4264     expand_env(s1, exp1, MAXPATHL);
4265     r1 = mch_stat((char *)exp1, &st1);
4266     r2 = mch_stat((char *)s2, &st2);
4267     if (r1 != 0 && r2 != 0)
4268     {
4269 	/* if mch_stat() doesn't work, may compare the names */
4270 	if (checkname)
4271 	{
4272 	    if (fnamecmp(exp1, s2) == 0)
4273 		return FPC_SAMEX;
4274 	    r1 = vim_FullName(exp1, full1, MAXPATHL, FALSE);
4275 	    r2 = vim_FullName(s2, full2, MAXPATHL, FALSE);
4276 	    if (r1 == OK && r2 == OK && fnamecmp(full1, full2) == 0)
4277 		return FPC_SAMEX;
4278 	}
4279 	return FPC_NOTX;
4280     }
4281     if (r1 != 0 || r2 != 0)
4282 	return FPC_DIFFX;
4283     if (st1.st_dev == st2.st_dev && st1.st_ino == st2.st_ino)
4284 	return FPC_SAME;
4285     return FPC_DIFF;
4286 #else
4287     char_u  *exp1;		/* expanded s1 */
4288     char_u  *full1;		/* full path of s1 */
4289     char_u  *full2;		/* full path of s2 */
4290     int	    retval = FPC_DIFF;
4291     int	    r1, r2;
4292 
4293     /* allocate one buffer to store three paths (alloc()/free() is slow!) */
4294     if ((exp1 = alloc(MAXPATHL * 3)) != NULL)
4295     {
4296 	full1 = exp1 + MAXPATHL;
4297 	full2 = full1 + MAXPATHL;
4298 
4299 	expand_env(s1, exp1, MAXPATHL);
4300 	r1 = vim_FullName(exp1, full1, MAXPATHL, FALSE);
4301 	r2 = vim_FullName(s2, full2, MAXPATHL, FALSE);
4302 
4303 	/* If vim_FullName() fails, the file probably doesn't exist. */
4304 	if (r1 != OK && r2 != OK)
4305 	{
4306 	    if (checkname && fnamecmp(exp1, s2) == 0)
4307 		retval = FPC_SAMEX;
4308 	    else
4309 		retval = FPC_NOTX;
4310 	}
4311 	else if (r1 != OK || r2 != OK)
4312 	    retval = FPC_DIFFX;
4313 	else if (fnamecmp(full1, full2))
4314 	    retval = FPC_DIFF;
4315 	else
4316 	    retval = FPC_SAME;
4317 	vim_free(exp1);
4318     }
4319     return retval;
4320 #endif
4321 }
4322 
4323 /*
4324  * Get the tail of a path: the file name.
4325  * Fail safe: never returns NULL.
4326  */
4327     char_u *
4328 gettail(fname)
4329     char_u *fname;
4330 {
4331     char_u  *p1, *p2;
4332 
4333     if (fname == NULL)
4334 	return (char_u *)"";
4335     for (p1 = p2 = fname; *p2; )	/* find last part of path */
4336     {
4337 	if (vim_ispathsep(*p2))
4338 	    p1 = p2 + 1;
4339 	mb_ptr_adv(p2);
4340     }
4341     return p1;
4342 }
4343 
4344 /*
4345  * Get pointer to tail of "fname", including path separators.  Putting a NUL
4346  * here leaves the directory name.  Takes care of "c:/" and "//".
4347  * Always returns a valid pointer.
4348  */
4349     char_u *
4350 gettail_sep(fname)
4351     char_u	*fname;
4352 {
4353     char_u	*p;
4354     char_u	*t;
4355 
4356     p = get_past_head(fname);	/* don't remove the '/' from "c:/file" */
4357     t = gettail(fname);
4358     while (t > p && after_pathsep(fname, t))
4359 	--t;
4360 #ifdef VMS
4361     /* path separator is part of the path */
4362     ++t;
4363 #endif
4364     return t;
4365 }
4366 
4367 /*
4368  * get the next path component (just after the next path separator).
4369  */
4370     char_u *
4371 getnextcomp(fname)
4372     char_u *fname;
4373 {
4374     while (*fname && !vim_ispathsep(*fname))
4375 	mb_ptr_adv(fname);
4376     if (*fname)
4377 	++fname;
4378     return fname;
4379 }
4380 
4381 /*
4382  * Get a pointer to one character past the head of a path name.
4383  * Unix: after "/"; DOS: after "c:\"; Amiga: after "disk:/"; Mac: no head.
4384  * If there is no head, path is returned.
4385  */
4386     char_u *
4387 get_past_head(path)
4388     char_u  *path;
4389 {
4390     char_u  *retval;
4391 
4392 #if defined(MSDOS) || defined(MSWIN) || defined(OS2)
4393     /* may skip "c:" */
4394     if (isalpha(path[0]) && path[1] == ':')
4395 	retval = path + 2;
4396     else
4397 	retval = path;
4398 #else
4399 # if defined(AMIGA)
4400     /* may skip "label:" */
4401     retval = vim_strchr(path, ':');
4402     if (retval == NULL)
4403 	retval = path;
4404 # else	/* Unix */
4405     retval = path;
4406 # endif
4407 #endif
4408 
4409     while (vim_ispathsep(*retval))
4410 	++retval;
4411 
4412     return retval;
4413 }
4414 
4415 /*
4416  * return TRUE if 'c' is a path separator.
4417  */
4418     int
4419 vim_ispathsep(c)
4420     int c;
4421 {
4422 #ifdef RISCOS
4423     return (c == '.' || c == ':');
4424 #else
4425 # ifdef UNIX
4426     return (c == '/');	    /* UNIX has ':' inside file names */
4427 # else
4428 #  ifdef BACKSLASH_IN_FILENAME
4429     return (c == ':' || c == '/' || c == '\\');
4430 #  else
4431 #   ifdef VMS
4432     /* server"user passwd"::device:[full.path.name]fname.extension;version" */
4433     return (c == ':' || c == '[' || c == ']' || c == '/'
4434 	    || c == '<' || c == '>' || c == '"' );
4435 #   else		/* Amiga */
4436     return (c == ':' || c == '/');
4437 #   endif /* VMS */
4438 #  endif
4439 # endif
4440 #endif /* RISC OS */
4441 }
4442 
4443 #if defined(FEAT_SEARCHPATH) || defined(PROTO)
4444 /*
4445  * return TRUE if 'c' is a path list separator.
4446  */
4447     int
4448 vim_ispathlistsep(c)
4449     int c;
4450 {
4451 #ifdef UNIX
4452     return (c == ':');
4453 #else
4454     return (c == ';');	/* might not be rigth for every system... */
4455 #endif
4456 }
4457 #endif
4458 
4459 #if defined(FEAT_GUI_TABLINE) || defined(FEAT_WINDOWS) \
4460 	|| defined(FEAT_EVAL) || defined(PROTO)
4461 /*
4462  * Shorten the path of a file from "~/foo/../.bar/fname" to "~/f/../.b/fname"
4463  * It's done in-place.
4464  */
4465     void
4466 shorten_dir(str)
4467     char_u *str;
4468 {
4469     char_u	*tail, *s, *d;
4470     int		skip = FALSE;
4471 
4472     tail = gettail(str);
4473     d = str;
4474     for (s = str; ; ++s)
4475     {
4476 	if (s >= tail)		    /* copy the whole tail */
4477 	{
4478 	    *d++ = *s;
4479 	    if (*s == NUL)
4480 		break;
4481 	}
4482 	else if (vim_ispathsep(*s))	    /* copy '/' and next char */
4483 	{
4484 	    *d++ = *s;
4485 	    skip = FALSE;
4486 	}
4487 	else if (!skip)
4488 	{
4489 	    *d++ = *s;		    /* copy next char */
4490 	    if (*s != '~' && *s != '.') /* and leading "~" and "." */
4491 		skip = TRUE;
4492 # ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
4493 	    if (has_mbyte)
4494 	    {
4495 		int l = mb_ptr2len(s);
4496 
4497 		while (--l > 0)
4498 		    *d++ = *++s;
4499 	    }
4500 # endif
4501 	}
4502     }
4503 }
4504 #endif
4505 
4506 /*
4507  * Return TRUE if the directory of "fname" exists, FALSE otherwise.
4508  * Also returns TRUE if there is no directory name.
4509  * "fname" must be writable!.
4510  */
4511     int
4512 dir_of_file_exists(fname)
4513     char_u	*fname;
4514 {
4515     char_u	*p;
4516     int		c;
4517     int		retval;
4518 
4519     p = gettail_sep(fname);
4520     if (p == fname)
4521 	return TRUE;
4522     c = *p;
4523     *p = NUL;
4524     retval = mch_isdir(fname);
4525     *p = c;
4526     return retval;
4527 }
4528 
4529 #if (defined(CASE_INSENSITIVE_FILENAME) && defined(BACKSLASH_IN_FILENAME)) \
4530 	|| defined(PROTO)
4531 /*
4532  * Versions of fnamecmp() and fnamencmp() that handle '/' and '\' equally.
4533  */
4534     int
4535 vim_fnamecmp(x, y)
4536     char_u	*x, *y;
4537 {
4538     return vim_fnamencmp(x, y, MAXPATHL);
4539 }
4540 
4541     int
4542 vim_fnamencmp(x, y, len)
4543     char_u	*x, *y;
4544     size_t	len;
4545 {
4546     while (len > 0 && *x && *y)
4547     {
4548 	if (TOLOWER_LOC(*x) != TOLOWER_LOC(*y)
4549 		&& !(*x == '/' && *y == '\\')
4550 		&& !(*x == '\\' && *y == '/'))
4551 	    break;
4552 	++x;
4553 	++y;
4554 	--len;
4555     }
4556     if (len == 0)
4557 	return 0;
4558     return (*x - *y);
4559 }
4560 #endif
4561 
4562 /*
4563  * Concatenate file names fname1 and fname2 into allocated memory.
4564  * Only add a '/' or '\\' when 'sep' is TRUE and it is neccesary.
4565  */
4566     char_u  *
4567 concat_fnames(fname1, fname2, sep)
4568     char_u  *fname1;
4569     char_u  *fname2;
4570     int	    sep;
4571 {
4572     char_u  *dest;
4573 
4574     dest = alloc((unsigned)(STRLEN(fname1) + STRLEN(fname2) + 3));
4575     if (dest != NULL)
4576     {
4577 	STRCPY(dest, fname1);
4578 	if (sep)
4579 	    add_pathsep(dest);
4580 	STRCAT(dest, fname2);
4581     }
4582     return dest;
4583 }
4584 
4585 #if defined(FEAT_EVAL) || defined(FEAT_GETTEXT) || defined(PROTO)
4586 /*
4587  * Concatenate two strings and return the result in allocated memory.
4588  * Returns NULL when out of memory.
4589  */
4590     char_u  *
4591 concat_str(str1, str2)
4592     char_u  *str1;
4593     char_u  *str2;
4594 {
4595     char_u  *dest;
4596     size_t  l = STRLEN(str1);
4597 
4598     dest = alloc((unsigned)(l + STRLEN(str2) + 1L));
4599     if (dest != NULL)
4600     {
4601 	STRCPY(dest, str1);
4602 	STRCPY(dest + l, str2);
4603     }
4604     return dest;
4605 }
4606 #endif
4607 
4608 /*
4609  * Add a path separator to a file name, unless it already ends in a path
4610  * separator.
4611  */
4612     void
4613 add_pathsep(p)
4614     char_u	*p;
4615 {
4616     if (*p != NUL && !after_pathsep(p, p + STRLEN(p)))
4617 	STRCAT(p, PATHSEPSTR);
4618 }
4619 
4620 /*
4621  * FullName_save - Make an allocated copy of a full file name.
4622  * Returns NULL when out of memory.
4623  */
4624     char_u  *
4625 FullName_save(fname, force)
4626     char_u	*fname;
4627     int		force;	    /* force expansion, even when it already looks
4628 			       like a full path name */
4629 {
4630     char_u	*buf;
4631     char_u	*new_fname = NULL;
4632 
4633     if (fname == NULL)
4634 	return NULL;
4635 
4636     buf = alloc((unsigned)MAXPATHL);
4637     if (buf != NULL)
4638     {
4639 	if (vim_FullName(fname, buf, MAXPATHL, force) != FAIL)
4640 	    new_fname = vim_strsave(buf);
4641 	else
4642 	    new_fname = vim_strsave(fname);
4643 	vim_free(buf);
4644     }
4645     return new_fname;
4646 }
4647 
4648 #if defined(FEAT_CINDENT) || defined(FEAT_SYN_HL)
4649 
4650 static char_u	*skip_string __ARGS((char_u *p));
4651 
4652 /*
4653  * Find the start of a comment, not knowing if we are in a comment right now.
4654  * Search starts at w_cursor.lnum and goes backwards.
4655  */
4656     pos_T *
4657 find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment)	    /* XXX */
4658     int		ind_maxcomment;
4659 {
4660     pos_T	*pos;
4661     char_u	*line;
4662     char_u	*p;
4663     int		cur_maxcomment = ind_maxcomment;
4664 
4665     for (;;)
4666     {
4667 	pos = findmatchlimit(NULL, '*', FM_BACKWARD, cur_maxcomment);
4668 	if (pos == NULL)
4669 	    break;
4670 
4671 	/*
4672 	 * Check if the comment start we found is inside a string.
4673 	 * If it is then restrict the search to below this line and try again.
4674 	 */
4675 	line = ml_get(pos->lnum);
4676 	for (p = line; *p && (unsigned)(p - line) < pos->col; ++p)
4677 	    p = skip_string(p);
4678 	if ((unsigned)(p - line) <= pos->col)
4679 	    break;
4680 	cur_maxcomment = curwin->w_cursor.lnum - pos->lnum - 1;
4681 	if (cur_maxcomment <= 0)
4682 	{
4683 	    pos = NULL;
4684 	    break;
4685 	}
4686     }
4687     return pos;
4688 }
4689 
4690 /*
4691  * Skip to the end of a "string" and a 'c' character.
4692  * If there is no string or character, return argument unmodified.
4693  */
4694     static char_u *
4695 skip_string(p)
4696     char_u  *p;
4697 {
4698     int	    i;
4699 
4700     /*
4701      * We loop, because strings may be concatenated: "date""time".
4702      */
4703     for ( ; ; ++p)
4704     {
4705 	if (p[0] == '\'')		    /* 'c' or '\n' or '\000' */
4706 	{
4707 	    if (!p[1])			    /* ' at end of line */
4708 		break;
4709 	    i = 2;
4710 	    if (p[1] == '\\')		    /* '\n' or '\000' */
4711 	    {
4712 		++i;
4713 		while (vim_isdigit(p[i - 1]))   /* '\000' */
4714 		    ++i;
4715 	    }
4716 	    if (p[i] == '\'')		    /* check for trailing ' */
4717 	    {
4718 		p += i;
4719 		continue;
4720 	    }
4721 	}
4722 	else if (p[0] == '"')		    /* start of string */
4723 	{
4724 	    for (++p; p[0]; ++p)
4725 	    {
4726 		if (p[0] == '\\' && p[1] != NUL)
4727 		    ++p;
4728 		else if (p[0] == '"')	    /* end of string */
4729 		    break;
4730 	    }
4731 	    if (p[0] == '"')
4732 		continue;
4733 	}
4734 	break;				    /* no string found */
4735     }
4736     if (!*p)
4737 	--p;				    /* backup from NUL */
4738     return p;
4739 }
4740 #endif /* FEAT_CINDENT || FEAT_SYN_HL */
4741 
4742 #if defined(FEAT_CINDENT) || defined(PROTO)
4743 
4744 /*
4745  * Do C or expression indenting on the current line.
4746  */
4747     void
4748 do_c_expr_indent()
4749 {
4750 # ifdef FEAT_EVAL
4751     if (*curbuf->b_p_inde != NUL)
4752 	fixthisline(get_expr_indent);
4753     else
4754 # endif
4755 	fixthisline(get_c_indent);
4756 }
4757 
4758 /*
4759  * Functions for C-indenting.
4760  * Most of this originally comes from Eric Fischer.
4761  */
4762 /*
4763  * Below "XXX" means that this function may unlock the current line.
4764  */
4765 
4766 static char_u	*cin_skipcomment __ARGS((char_u *));
4767 static int	cin_nocode __ARGS((char_u *));
4768 static pos_T	*find_line_comment __ARGS((void));
4769 static int	cin_islabel_skip __ARGS((char_u **));
4770 static int	cin_isdefault __ARGS((char_u *));
4771 static char_u	*after_label __ARGS((char_u *l));
4772 static int	get_indent_nolabel __ARGS((linenr_T lnum));
4773 static int	skip_label __ARGS((linenr_T, char_u **pp, int ind_maxcomment));
4774 static int	cin_first_id_amount __ARGS((void));
4775 static int	cin_get_equal_amount __ARGS((linenr_T lnum));
4776 static int	cin_ispreproc __ARGS((char_u *));
4777 static int	cin_ispreproc_cont __ARGS((char_u **pp, linenr_T *lnump));
4778 static int	cin_iscomment __ARGS((char_u *));
4779 static int	cin_islinecomment __ARGS((char_u *));
4780 static int	cin_isterminated __ARGS((char_u *, int, int));
4781 static int	cin_isinit __ARGS((void));
4782 static int	cin_isfuncdecl __ARGS((char_u **, linenr_T));
4783 static int	cin_isif __ARGS((char_u *));
4784 static int	cin_iselse __ARGS((char_u *));
4785 static int	cin_isdo __ARGS((char_u *));
4786 static int	cin_iswhileofdo __ARGS((char_u *, linenr_T, int));
4787 static int	cin_iswhileofdo_end __ARGS((int terminated, int	ind_maxparen, int ind_maxcomment));
4788 static int	cin_isbreak __ARGS((char_u *));
4789 static int	cin_is_cpp_baseclass __ARGS((char_u *line, colnr_T *col));
4790 static int	get_baseclass_amount __ARGS((int col, int ind_maxparen, int ind_maxcomment, int ind_cpp_baseclass));
4791 static int	cin_ends_in __ARGS((char_u *, char_u *, char_u *));
4792 static int	cin_skip2pos __ARGS((pos_T *trypos));
4793 static pos_T	*find_start_brace __ARGS((int));
4794 static pos_T	*find_match_paren __ARGS((int, int));
4795 static int	corr_ind_maxparen __ARGS((int ind_maxparen, pos_T *startpos));
4796 static int	find_last_paren __ARGS((char_u *l, int start, int end));
4797 static int	find_match __ARGS((int lookfor, linenr_T ourscope, int ind_maxparen, int ind_maxcomment));
4798 
4799 static int	ind_hash_comment = 0;   /* # starts a comment */
4800 
4801 /*
4802  * Skip over white space and C comments within the line.
4803  * Also skip over Perl/shell comments if desired.
4804  */
4805     static char_u *
4806 cin_skipcomment(s)
4807     char_u	*s;
4808 {
4809     while (*s)
4810     {
4811 	char_u *prev_s = s;
4812 
4813 	s = skipwhite(s);
4814 
4815 	/* Perl/shell # comment comment continues until eol.  Require a space
4816 	 * before # to avoid recognizing $#array. */
4817 	if (ind_hash_comment != 0 && s != prev_s && *s == '#')
4818 	{
4819 	    s += STRLEN(s);
4820 	    break;
4821 	}
4822 	if (*s != '/')
4823 	    break;
4824 	++s;
4825 	if (*s == '/')		/* slash-slash comment continues till eol */
4826 	{
4827 	    s += STRLEN(s);
4828 	    break;
4829 	}
4830 	if (*s != '*')
4831 	    break;
4832 	for (++s; *s; ++s)	/* skip slash-star comment */
4833 	    if (s[0] == '*' && s[1] == '/')
4834 	    {
4835 		s += 2;
4836 		break;
4837 	    }
4838     }
4839     return s;
4840 }
4841 
4842 /*
4843  * Return TRUE if there there is no code at *s.  White space and comments are
4844  * not considered code.
4845  */
4846     static int
4847 cin_nocode(s)
4848     char_u	*s;
4849 {
4850     return *cin_skipcomment(s) == NUL;
4851 }
4852 
4853 /*
4854  * Check previous lines for a "//" line comment, skipping over blank lines.
4855  */
4856     static pos_T *
4857 find_line_comment() /* XXX */
4858 {
4859     static pos_T pos;
4860     char_u	 *line;
4861     char_u	 *p;
4862 
4863     pos = curwin->w_cursor;
4864     while (--pos.lnum > 0)
4865     {
4866 	line = ml_get(pos.lnum);
4867 	p = skipwhite(line);
4868 	if (cin_islinecomment(p))
4869 	{
4870 	    pos.col = (int)(p - line);
4871 	    return &pos;
4872 	}
4873 	if (*p != NUL)
4874 	    break;
4875     }
4876     return NULL;
4877 }
4878 
4879 /*
4880  * Check if string matches "label:"; move to character after ':' if true.
4881  */
4882     static int
4883 cin_islabel_skip(s)
4884     char_u	**s;
4885 {
4886     if (!vim_isIDc(**s))	    /* need at least one ID character */
4887 	return FALSE;
4888 
4889     while (vim_isIDc(**s))
4890 	(*s)++;
4891 
4892     *s = cin_skipcomment(*s);
4893 
4894     /* "::" is not a label, it's C++ */
4895     return (**s == ':' && *++*s != ':');
4896 }
4897 
4898 /*
4899  * Recognize a label: "label:".
4900  * Note: curwin->w_cursor must be where we are looking for the label.
4901  */
4902     int
4903 cin_islabel(ind_maxcomment)		/* XXX */
4904     int		ind_maxcomment;
4905 {
4906     char_u	*s;
4907 
4908     s = cin_skipcomment(ml_get_curline());
4909 
4910     /*
4911      * Exclude "default" from labels, since it should be indented
4912      * like a switch label.  Same for C++ scope declarations.
4913      */
4914     if (cin_isdefault(s))
4915 	return FALSE;
4916     if (cin_isscopedecl(s))
4917 	return FALSE;
4918 
4919     if (cin_islabel_skip(&s))
4920     {
4921 	/*
4922 	 * Only accept a label if the previous line is terminated or is a case
4923 	 * label.
4924 	 */
4925 	pos_T	cursor_save;
4926 	pos_T	*trypos;
4927 	char_u	*line;
4928 
4929 	cursor_save = curwin->w_cursor;
4930 	while (curwin->w_cursor.lnum > 1)
4931 	{
4932 	    --curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
4933 
4934 	    /*
4935 	     * If we're in a comment now, skip to the start of the comment.
4936 	     */
4937 	    curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
4938 	    if ((trypos = find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment)) != NULL) /* XXX */
4939 		curwin->w_cursor = *trypos;
4940 
4941 	    line = ml_get_curline();
4942 	    if (cin_ispreproc(line))	/* ignore #defines, #if, etc. */
4943 		continue;
4944 	    if (*(line = cin_skipcomment(line)) == NUL)
4945 		continue;
4946 
4947 	    curwin->w_cursor = cursor_save;
4948 	    if (cin_isterminated(line, TRUE, FALSE)
4949 		    || cin_isscopedecl(line)
4950 		    || cin_iscase(line)
4951 		    || (cin_islabel_skip(&line) && cin_nocode(line)))
4952 		return TRUE;
4953 	    return FALSE;
4954 	}
4955 	curwin->w_cursor = cursor_save;
4956 	return TRUE;		/* label at start of file??? */
4957     }
4958     return FALSE;
4959 }
4960 
4961 /*
4962  * Recognize structure initialization and enumerations.
4963  * Q&D-Implementation:
4964  * check for "=" at end or "[typedef] enum" at beginning of line.
4965  */
4966     static int
4967 cin_isinit(void)
4968 {
4969     char_u	*s;
4970 
4971     s = cin_skipcomment(ml_get_curline());
4972 
4973     if (STRNCMP(s, "typedef", 7) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(s[7]))
4974 	s = cin_skipcomment(s + 7);
4975 
4976     if (STRNCMP(s, "enum", 4) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(s[4]))
4977 	return TRUE;
4978 
4979     if (cin_ends_in(s, (char_u *)"=", (char_u *)"{"))
4980 	return TRUE;
4981 
4982     return FALSE;
4983 }
4984 
4985 /*
4986  * Recognize a switch label: "case .*:" or "default:".
4987  */
4988      int
4989 cin_iscase(s)
4990     char_u *s;
4991 {
4992     s = cin_skipcomment(s);
4993     if (STRNCMP(s, "case", 4) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(s[4]))
4994     {
4995 	for (s += 4; *s; ++s)
4996 	{
4997 	    s = cin_skipcomment(s);
4998 	    if (*s == ':')
4999 	    {
5000 		if (s[1] == ':')	/* skip over "::" for C++ */
5001 		    ++s;
5002 		else
5003 		    return TRUE;
5004 	    }
5005 	    if (*s == '\'' && s[1] && s[2] == '\'')
5006 		s += 2;			/* skip over '.' */
5007 	    else if (*s == '/' && (s[1] == '*' || s[1] == '/'))
5008 		return FALSE;		/* stop at comment */
5009 	    else if (*s == '"')
5010 		return FALSE;		/* stop at string */
5011 	}
5012 	return FALSE;
5013     }
5014 
5015     if (cin_isdefault(s))
5016 	return TRUE;
5017     return FALSE;
5018 }
5019 
5020 /*
5021  * Recognize a "default" switch label.
5022  */
5023     static int
5024 cin_isdefault(s)
5025     char_u  *s;
5026 {
5027     return (STRNCMP(s, "default", 7) == 0
5028 	    && *(s = cin_skipcomment(s + 7)) == ':'
5029 	    && s[1] != ':');
5030 }
5031 
5032 /*
5033  * Recognize a "public/private/proctected" scope declaration label.
5034  */
5035     int
5036 cin_isscopedecl(s)
5037     char_u	*s;
5038 {
5039     int		i;
5040 
5041     s = cin_skipcomment(s);
5042     if (STRNCMP(s, "public", 6) == 0)
5043 	i = 6;
5044     else if (STRNCMP(s, "protected", 9) == 0)
5045 	i = 9;
5046     else if (STRNCMP(s, "private", 7) == 0)
5047 	i = 7;
5048     else
5049 	return FALSE;
5050     return (*(s = cin_skipcomment(s + i)) == ':' && s[1] != ':');
5051 }
5052 
5053 /*
5054  * Return a pointer to the first non-empty non-comment character after a ':'.
5055  * Return NULL if not found.
5056  *	  case 234:    a = b;
5057  *		       ^
5058  */
5059     static char_u *
5060 after_label(l)
5061     char_u  *l;
5062 {
5063     for ( ; *l; ++l)
5064     {
5065 	if (*l == ':')
5066 	{
5067 	    if (l[1] == ':')	    /* skip over "::" for C++ */
5068 		++l;
5069 	    else if (!cin_iscase(l + 1))
5070 		break;
5071 	}
5072 	else if (*l == '\'' && l[1] && l[2] == '\'')
5073 	    l += 2;		    /* skip over 'x' */
5074     }
5075     if (*l == NUL)
5076 	return NULL;
5077     l = cin_skipcomment(l + 1);
5078     if (*l == NUL)
5079 	return NULL;
5080     return l;
5081 }
5082 
5083 /*
5084  * Get indent of line "lnum", skipping a label.
5085  * Return 0 if there is nothing after the label.
5086  */
5087     static int
5088 get_indent_nolabel(lnum)		/* XXX */
5089     linenr_T	lnum;
5090 {
5091     char_u	*l;
5092     pos_T	fp;
5093     colnr_T	col;
5094     char_u	*p;
5095 
5096     l = ml_get(lnum);
5097     p = after_label(l);
5098     if (p == NULL)
5099 	return 0;
5100 
5101     fp.col = (colnr_T)(p - l);
5102     fp.lnum = lnum;
5103     getvcol(curwin, &fp, &col, NULL, NULL);
5104     return (int)col;
5105 }
5106 
5107 /*
5108  * Find indent for line "lnum", ignoring any case or jump label.
5109  * Also return a pointer to the text (after the label) in "pp".
5110  *   label:	if (asdf && asdfasdf)
5111  *		^
5112  */
5113     static int
5114 skip_label(lnum, pp, ind_maxcomment)
5115     linenr_T	lnum;
5116     char_u	**pp;
5117     int		ind_maxcomment;
5118 {
5119     char_u	*l;
5120     int		amount;
5121     pos_T	cursor_save;
5122 
5123     cursor_save = curwin->w_cursor;
5124     curwin->w_cursor.lnum = lnum;
5125     l = ml_get_curline();
5126 				    /* XXX */
5127     if (cin_iscase(l) || cin_isscopedecl(l) || cin_islabel(ind_maxcomment))
5128     {
5129 	amount = get_indent_nolabel(lnum);
5130 	l = after_label(ml_get_curline());
5131 	if (l == NULL)		/* just in case */
5132 	    l = ml_get_curline();
5133     }
5134     else
5135     {
5136 	amount = get_indent();
5137 	l = ml_get_curline();
5138     }
5139     *pp = l;
5140 
5141     curwin->w_cursor = cursor_save;
5142     return amount;
5143 }
5144 
5145 /*
5146  * Return the indent of the first variable name after a type in a declaration.
5147  *  int	    a,			indent of "a"
5148  *  static struct foo    b,	indent of "b"
5149  *  enum bla    c,		indent of "c"
5150  * Returns zero when it doesn't look like a declaration.
5151  */
5152     static int
5153 cin_first_id_amount()
5154 {
5155     char_u	*line, *p, *s;
5156     int		len;
5157     pos_T	fp;
5158     colnr_T	col;
5159 
5160     line = ml_get_curline();
5161     p = skipwhite(line);
5162     len = (int)(skiptowhite(p) - p);
5163     if (len == 6 && STRNCMP(p, "static", 6) == 0)
5164     {
5165 	p = skipwhite(p + 6);
5166 	len = (int)(skiptowhite(p) - p);
5167     }
5168     if (len == 6 && STRNCMP(p, "struct", 6) == 0)
5169 	p = skipwhite(p + 6);
5170     else if (len == 4 && STRNCMP(p, "enum", 4) == 0)
5171 	p = skipwhite(p + 4);
5172     else if ((len == 8 && STRNCMP(p, "unsigned", 8) == 0)
5173 	    || (len == 6 && STRNCMP(p, "signed", 6) == 0))
5174     {
5175 	s = skipwhite(p + len);
5176 	if ((STRNCMP(s, "int", 3) == 0 && vim_iswhite(s[3]))
5177 		|| (STRNCMP(s, "long", 4) == 0 && vim_iswhite(s[4]))
5178 		|| (STRNCMP(s, "short", 5) == 0 && vim_iswhite(s[5]))
5179 		|| (STRNCMP(s, "char", 4) == 0 && vim_iswhite(s[4])))
5180 	    p = s;
5181     }
5182     for (len = 0; vim_isIDc(p[len]); ++len)
5183 	;
5184     if (len == 0 || !vim_iswhite(p[len]) || cin_nocode(p))
5185 	return 0;
5186 
5187     p = skipwhite(p + len);
5188     fp.lnum = curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
5189     fp.col = (colnr_T)(p - line);
5190     getvcol(curwin, &fp, &col, NULL, NULL);
5191     return (int)col;
5192 }
5193 
5194 /*
5195  * Return the indent of the first non-blank after an equal sign.
5196  *       char *foo = "here";
5197  * Return zero if no (useful) equal sign found.
5198  * Return -1 if the line above "lnum" ends in a backslash.
5199  *      foo = "asdf\
5200  *	       asdf\
5201  *	       here";
5202  */
5203     static int
5204 cin_get_equal_amount(lnum)
5205     linenr_T	lnum;
5206 {
5207     char_u	*line;
5208     char_u	*s;
5209     colnr_T	col;
5210     pos_T	fp;
5211 
5212     if (lnum > 1)
5213     {
5214 	line = ml_get(lnum - 1);
5215 	if (*line != NUL && line[STRLEN(line) - 1] == '\\')
5216 	    return -1;
5217     }
5218 
5219     line = s = ml_get(lnum);
5220     while (*s != NUL && vim_strchr((char_u *)"=;{}\"'", *s) == NULL)
5221     {
5222 	if (cin_iscomment(s))	/* ignore comments */
5223 	    s = cin_skipcomment(s);
5224 	else
5225 	    ++s;
5226     }
5227     if (*s != '=')
5228 	return 0;
5229 
5230     s = skipwhite(s + 1);
5231     if (cin_nocode(s))
5232 	return 0;
5233 
5234     if (*s == '"')	/* nice alignment for continued strings */
5235 	++s;
5236 
5237     fp.lnum = lnum;
5238     fp.col = (colnr_T)(s - line);
5239     getvcol(curwin, &fp, &col, NULL, NULL);
5240     return (int)col;
5241 }
5242 
5243 /*
5244  * Recognize a preprocessor statement: Any line that starts with '#'.
5245  */
5246     static int
5247 cin_ispreproc(s)
5248     char_u *s;
5249 {
5250     s = skipwhite(s);
5251     if (*s == '#')
5252 	return TRUE;
5253     return FALSE;
5254 }
5255 
5256 /*
5257  * Return TRUE if line "*pp" at "*lnump" is a preprocessor statement or a
5258  * continuation line of a preprocessor statement.  Decrease "*lnump" to the
5259  * start and return the line in "*pp".
5260  */
5261     static int
5262 cin_ispreproc_cont(pp, lnump)
5263     char_u	**pp;
5264     linenr_T	*lnump;
5265 {
5266     char_u	*line = *pp;
5267     linenr_T	lnum = *lnump;
5268     int		retval = FALSE;
5269 
5270     for (;;)
5271     {
5272 	if (cin_ispreproc(line))
5273 	{
5274 	    retval = TRUE;
5275 	    *lnump = lnum;
5276 	    break;
5277 	}
5278 	if (lnum == 1)
5279 	    break;
5280 	line = ml_get(--lnum);
5281 	if (*line == NUL || line[STRLEN(line) - 1] != '\\')
5282 	    break;
5283     }
5284 
5285     if (lnum != *lnump)
5286 	*pp = ml_get(*lnump);
5287     return retval;
5288 }
5289 
5290 /*
5291  * Recognize the start of a C or C++ comment.
5292  */
5293     static int
5294 cin_iscomment(p)
5295     char_u  *p;
5296 {
5297     return (p[0] == '/' && (p[1] == '*' || p[1] == '/'));
5298 }
5299 
5300 /*
5301  * Recognize the start of a "//" comment.
5302  */
5303     static int
5304 cin_islinecomment(p)
5305     char_u *p;
5306 {
5307     return (p[0] == '/' && p[1] == '/');
5308 }
5309 
5310 /*
5311  * Recognize a line that starts with '{' or '}', or ends with ';', '{' or '}'.
5312  * Don't consider "} else" a terminated line.
5313  * Return the character terminating the line (ending char's have precedence if
5314  * both apply in order to determine initializations).
5315  */
5316     static int
5317 cin_isterminated(s, incl_open, incl_comma)
5318     char_u	*s;
5319     int		incl_open;	/* include '{' at the end as terminator */
5320     int		incl_comma;	/* recognize a trailing comma */
5321 {
5322     char_u found_start = 0;
5323 
5324     s = cin_skipcomment(s);
5325 
5326     if (*s == '{' || (*s == '}' && !cin_iselse(s)))
5327 	found_start = *s;
5328 
5329     while (*s)
5330     {
5331 	/* skip over comments, "" strings and 'c'haracters */
5332 	s = skip_string(cin_skipcomment(s));
5333 	if ((*s == ';' || (incl_open && *s == '{') || *s == '}'
5334 						 || (incl_comma && *s == ','))
5335 		&& cin_nocode(s + 1))
5336 	    return *s;
5337 
5338 	if (*s)
5339 	    s++;
5340     }
5341     return found_start;
5342 }
5343 
5344 /*
5345  * Recognize the basic picture of a function declaration -- it needs to
5346  * have an open paren somewhere and a close paren at the end of the line and
5347  * no semicolons anywhere.
5348  * When a line ends in a comma we continue looking in the next line.
5349  * "sp" points to a string with the line.  When looking at other lines it must
5350  * be restored to the line.  When it's NULL fetch lines here.
5351  * "lnum" is where we start looking.
5352  */
5353     static int
5354 cin_isfuncdecl(sp, first_lnum)
5355     char_u	**sp;
5356     linenr_T	first_lnum;
5357 {
5358     char_u	*s;
5359     linenr_T	lnum = first_lnum;
5360     int		retval = FALSE;
5361 
5362     if (sp == NULL)
5363 	s = ml_get(lnum);
5364     else
5365 	s = *sp;
5366 
5367     while (*s && *s != '(' && *s != ';' && *s != '\'' && *s != '"')
5368     {
5369 	if (cin_iscomment(s))	/* ignore comments */
5370 	    s = cin_skipcomment(s);
5371 	else
5372 	    ++s;
5373     }
5374     if (*s != '(')
5375 	return FALSE;		/* ';', ' or "  before any () or no '(' */
5376 
5377     while (*s && *s != ';' && *s != '\'' && *s != '"')
5378     {
5379 	if (*s == ')' && cin_nocode(s + 1))
5380 	{
5381 	    /* ')' at the end: may have found a match
5382 	     * Check for he previous line not to end in a backslash:
5383 	     *       #if defined(x) && \
5384 	     *		 defined(y)
5385 	     */
5386 	    lnum = first_lnum - 1;
5387 	    s = ml_get(lnum);
5388 	    if (*s == NUL || s[STRLEN(s) - 1] != '\\')
5389 		retval = TRUE;
5390 	    goto done;
5391 	}
5392 	if (*s == ',' && cin_nocode(s + 1))
5393 	{
5394 	    /* ',' at the end: continue looking in the next line */
5395 	    if (lnum >= curbuf->b_ml.ml_line_count)
5396 		break;
5397 
5398 	    s = ml_get(++lnum);
5399 	}
5400 	else if (cin_iscomment(s))	/* ignore comments */
5401 	    s = cin_skipcomment(s);
5402 	else
5403 	    ++s;
5404     }
5405 
5406 done:
5407     if (lnum != first_lnum && sp != NULL)
5408 	*sp = ml_get(first_lnum);
5409 
5410     return retval;
5411 }
5412 
5413     static int
5414 cin_isif(p)
5415     char_u  *p;
5416 {
5417     return (STRNCMP(p, "if", 2) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(p[2]));
5418 }
5419 
5420     static int
5421 cin_iselse(p)
5422     char_u  *p;
5423 {
5424     if (*p == '}')	    /* accept "} else" */
5425 	p = cin_skipcomment(p + 1);
5426     return (STRNCMP(p, "else", 4) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(p[4]));
5427 }
5428 
5429     static int
5430 cin_isdo(p)
5431     char_u  *p;
5432 {
5433     return (STRNCMP(p, "do", 2) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(p[2]));
5434 }
5435 
5436 /*
5437  * Check if this is a "while" that should have a matching "do".
5438  * We only accept a "while (condition) ;", with only white space between the
5439  * ')' and ';'. The condition may be spread over several lines.
5440  */
5441     static int
5442 cin_iswhileofdo(p, lnum, ind_maxparen)	    /* XXX */
5443     char_u	*p;
5444     linenr_T	lnum;
5445     int		ind_maxparen;
5446 {
5447     pos_T	cursor_save;
5448     pos_T	*trypos;
5449     int		retval = FALSE;
5450 
5451     p = cin_skipcomment(p);
5452     if (*p == '}')		/* accept "} while (cond);" */
5453 	p = cin_skipcomment(p + 1);
5454     if (STRNCMP(p, "while", 5) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(p[5]))
5455     {
5456 	cursor_save = curwin->w_cursor;
5457 	curwin->w_cursor.lnum = lnum;
5458 	curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
5459 	p = ml_get_curline();
5460 	while (*p && *p != 'w')	/* skip any '}', until the 'w' of the "while" */
5461 	{
5462 	    ++p;
5463 	    ++curwin->w_cursor.col;
5464 	}
5465 	if ((trypos = findmatchlimit(NULL, 0, 0, ind_maxparen)) != NULL
5466 		&& *cin_skipcomment(ml_get_pos(trypos) + 1) == ';')
5467 	    retval = TRUE;
5468 	curwin->w_cursor = cursor_save;
5469     }
5470     return retval;
5471 }
5472 
5473 /*
5474  * Return TRUE if we are at the end of a do-while.
5475  *    do
5476  *       nothing;
5477  *    while (foo
5478  *	       && bar);  <-- here
5479  * Adjust the cursor to the line with "while".
5480  */
5481     static int
5482 cin_iswhileofdo_end(terminated, ind_maxparen, ind_maxcomment)
5483     int	    terminated;
5484     int	    ind_maxparen;
5485     int	    ind_maxcomment;
5486 {
5487     char_u	*line;
5488     char_u	*p;
5489     char_u	*s;
5490     pos_T	*trypos;
5491     int		i;
5492 
5493     if (terminated != ';')	/* there must be a ';' at the end */
5494 	return FALSE;
5495 
5496     p = line = ml_get_curline();
5497     while (*p != NUL)
5498     {
5499 	p = cin_skipcomment(p);
5500 	if (*p == ')')
5501 	{
5502 	    s = skipwhite(p + 1);
5503 	    if (*s == ';' && cin_nocode(s + 1))
5504 	    {
5505 		/* Found ");" at end of the line, now check there is "while"
5506 		 * before the matching '('.  XXX */
5507 		i = (int)(p - line);
5508 		curwin->w_cursor.col = i;
5509 		trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen, ind_maxcomment);
5510 		if (trypos != NULL)
5511 		{
5512 		    s = cin_skipcomment(ml_get(trypos->lnum));
5513 		    if (*s == '}')		/* accept "} while (cond);" */
5514 			s = cin_skipcomment(s + 1);
5515 		    if (STRNCMP(s, "while", 5) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(s[5]))
5516 		    {
5517 			curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum;
5518 			return TRUE;
5519 		    }
5520 		}
5521 
5522 		/* Searching may have made "line" invalid, get it again. */
5523 		line = ml_get_curline();
5524 		p = line + i;
5525 	    }
5526 	}
5527 	if (*p != NUL)
5528 	    ++p;
5529     }
5530     return FALSE;
5531 }
5532 
5533     static int
5534 cin_isbreak(p)
5535     char_u  *p;
5536 {
5537     return (STRNCMP(p, "break", 5) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(p[5]));
5538 }
5539 
5540 /*
5541  * Find the position of a C++ base-class declaration or
5542  * constructor-initialization. eg:
5543  *
5544  * class MyClass :
5545  *	baseClass		<-- here
5546  * class MyClass : public baseClass,
5547  *	anotherBaseClass	<-- here (should probably lineup ??)
5548  * MyClass::MyClass(...) :
5549  *	baseClass(...)		<-- here (constructor-initialization)
5550  *
5551  * This is a lot of guessing.  Watch out for "cond ? func() : foo".
5552  */
5553     static int
5554 cin_is_cpp_baseclass(line, col)
5555     char_u	*line;
5556     colnr_T	*col;	    /* return: column to align with */
5557 {
5558     char_u	*s;
5559     int		class_or_struct, lookfor_ctor_init, cpp_base_class;
5560     linenr_T	lnum = curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
5561 
5562     *col = 0;
5563 
5564     s = skipwhite(line);
5565     if (*s == '#')		/* skip #define FOO x ? (x) : x */
5566 	return FALSE;
5567     s = cin_skipcomment(s);
5568     if (*s == NUL)
5569 	return FALSE;
5570 
5571     cpp_base_class = lookfor_ctor_init = class_or_struct = FALSE;
5572 
5573     /* Search for a line starting with '#', empty, ending in ';' or containing
5574      * '{' or '}' and start below it.  This handles the following situations:
5575      *	a = cond ?
5576      *	      func() :
5577      *		   asdf;
5578      *	func::foo()
5579      *	      : something
5580      *	{}
5581      *	Foo::Foo (int one, int two)
5582      *		: something(4),
5583      *		somethingelse(3)
5584      *	{}
5585      */
5586     while (lnum > 1)
5587     {
5588 	s = skipwhite(ml_get(lnum - 1));
5589 	if (*s == '#' || *s == NUL)
5590 	    break;
5591 	while (*s != NUL)
5592 	{
5593 	    s = cin_skipcomment(s);
5594 	    if (*s == '{' || *s == '}'
5595 		    || (*s == ';' && cin_nocode(s + 1)))
5596 		break;
5597 	    if (*s != NUL)
5598 		++s;
5599 	}
5600 	if (*s != NUL)
5601 	    break;
5602 	--lnum;
5603     }
5604 
5605     s = cin_skipcomment(ml_get(lnum));
5606     for (;;)
5607     {
5608 	if (*s == NUL)
5609 	{
5610 	    if (lnum == curwin->w_cursor.lnum)
5611 		break;
5612 	    /* Continue in the cursor line. */
5613 	    s = cin_skipcomment(ml_get(++lnum));
5614 	}
5615 
5616 	if (s[0] == ':')
5617 	{
5618 	    if (s[1] == ':')
5619 	    {
5620 		/* skip double colon. It can't be a constructor
5621 		 * initialization any more */
5622 		lookfor_ctor_init = FALSE;
5623 		s = cin_skipcomment(s + 2);
5624 	    }
5625 	    else if (lookfor_ctor_init || class_or_struct)
5626 	    {
5627 		/* we have something found, that looks like the start of
5628 		 * cpp-base-class-declaration or contructor-initialization */
5629 		cpp_base_class = TRUE;
5630 		lookfor_ctor_init = class_or_struct = FALSE;
5631 		*col = 0;
5632 		s = cin_skipcomment(s + 1);
5633 	    }
5634 	    else
5635 		s = cin_skipcomment(s + 1);
5636 	}
5637 	else if ((STRNCMP(s, "class", 5) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(s[5]))
5638 		|| (STRNCMP(s, "struct", 6) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(s[6])))
5639 	{
5640 	    class_or_struct = TRUE;
5641 	    lookfor_ctor_init = FALSE;
5642 
5643 	    if (*s == 'c')
5644 		s = cin_skipcomment(s + 5);
5645 	    else
5646 		s = cin_skipcomment(s + 6);
5647 	}
5648 	else
5649 	{
5650 	    if (s[0] == '{' || s[0] == '}' || s[0] == ';')
5651 	    {
5652 		cpp_base_class = lookfor_ctor_init = class_or_struct = FALSE;
5653 	    }
5654 	    else if (s[0] == ')')
5655 	    {
5656 		/* Constructor-initialization is assumed if we come across
5657 		 * something like "):" */
5658 		class_or_struct = FALSE;
5659 		lookfor_ctor_init = TRUE;
5660 	    }
5661 	    else if (s[0] == '?')
5662 	    {
5663 		/* Avoid seeing '() :' after '?' as constructor init. */
5664 		return FALSE;
5665 	    }
5666 	    else if (!vim_isIDc(s[0]))
5667 	    {
5668 		/* if it is not an identifier, we are wrong */
5669 		class_or_struct = FALSE;
5670 		lookfor_ctor_init = FALSE;
5671 	    }
5672 	    else if (*col == 0)
5673 	    {
5674 		/* it can't be a constructor-initialization any more */
5675 		lookfor_ctor_init = FALSE;
5676 
5677 		/* the first statement starts here: lineup with this one... */
5678 		if (cpp_base_class)
5679 		    *col = (colnr_T)(s - line);
5680 	    }
5681 
5682 	    /* When the line ends in a comma don't align with it. */
5683 	    if (lnum == curwin->w_cursor.lnum && *s == ',' && cin_nocode(s + 1))
5684 		*col = 0;
5685 
5686 	    s = cin_skipcomment(s + 1);
5687 	}
5688     }
5689 
5690     return cpp_base_class;
5691 }
5692 
5693     static int
5694 get_baseclass_amount(col, ind_maxparen, ind_maxcomment, ind_cpp_baseclass)
5695     int		col;
5696     int		ind_maxparen;
5697     int		ind_maxcomment;
5698     int		ind_cpp_baseclass;
5699 {
5700     int		amount;
5701     colnr_T	vcol;
5702     pos_T	*trypos;
5703 
5704     if (col == 0)
5705     {
5706 	amount = get_indent();
5707 	if (find_last_paren(ml_get_curline(), '(', ')')
5708 		&& (trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen,
5709 						     ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
5710 	    amount = get_indent_lnum(trypos->lnum); /* XXX */
5711 	if (!cin_ends_in(ml_get_curline(), (char_u *)",", NULL))
5712 	    amount += ind_cpp_baseclass;
5713     }
5714     else
5715     {
5716 	curwin->w_cursor.col = col;
5717 	getvcol(curwin, &curwin->w_cursor, &vcol, NULL, NULL);
5718 	amount = (int)vcol;
5719     }
5720     if (amount < ind_cpp_baseclass)
5721 	amount = ind_cpp_baseclass;
5722     return amount;
5723 }
5724 
5725 /*
5726  * Return TRUE if string "s" ends with the string "find", possibly followed by
5727  * white space and comments.  Skip strings and comments.
5728  * Ignore "ignore" after "find" if it's not NULL.
5729  */
5730     static int
5731 cin_ends_in(s, find, ignore)
5732     char_u	*s;
5733     char_u	*find;
5734     char_u	*ignore;
5735 {
5736     char_u	*p = s;
5737     char_u	*r;
5738     int		len = (int)STRLEN(find);
5739 
5740     while (*p != NUL)
5741     {
5742 	p = cin_skipcomment(p);
5743 	if (STRNCMP(p, find, len) == 0)
5744 	{
5745 	    r = skipwhite(p + len);
5746 	    if (ignore != NULL && STRNCMP(r, ignore, STRLEN(ignore)) == 0)
5747 		r = skipwhite(r + STRLEN(ignore));
5748 	    if (cin_nocode(r))
5749 		return TRUE;
5750 	}
5751 	if (*p != NUL)
5752 	    ++p;
5753     }
5754     return FALSE;
5755 }
5756 
5757 /*
5758  * Skip strings, chars and comments until at or past "trypos".
5759  * Return the column found.
5760  */
5761     static int
5762 cin_skip2pos(trypos)
5763     pos_T	*trypos;
5764 {
5765     char_u	*line;
5766     char_u	*p;
5767 
5768     p = line = ml_get(trypos->lnum);
5769     while (*p && (colnr_T)(p - line) < trypos->col)
5770     {
5771 	if (cin_iscomment(p))
5772 	    p = cin_skipcomment(p);
5773 	else
5774 	{
5775 	    p = skip_string(p);
5776 	    ++p;
5777 	}
5778     }
5779     return (int)(p - line);
5780 }
5781 
5782 /*
5783  * Find the '{' at the start of the block we are in.
5784  * Return NULL if no match found.
5785  * Ignore a '{' that is in a comment, makes indenting the next three lines
5786  * work. */
5787 /* foo()    */
5788 /* {	    */
5789 /* }	    */
5790 
5791     static pos_T *
5792 find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment)	    /* XXX */
5793     int		ind_maxcomment;
5794 {
5795     pos_T	cursor_save;
5796     pos_T	*trypos;
5797     pos_T	*pos;
5798     static pos_T	pos_copy;
5799 
5800     cursor_save = curwin->w_cursor;
5801     while ((trypos = findmatchlimit(NULL, '{', FM_BLOCKSTOP, 0)) != NULL)
5802     {
5803 	pos_copy = *trypos;	/* copy pos_T, next findmatch will change it */
5804 	trypos = &pos_copy;
5805 	curwin->w_cursor = *trypos;
5806 	pos = NULL;
5807 	/* ignore the { if it's in a // or / *  * / comment */
5808 	if ((colnr_T)cin_skip2pos(trypos) == trypos->col
5809 		&& (pos = find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment)) == NULL) /* XXX */
5810 	    break;
5811 	if (pos != NULL)
5812 	    curwin->w_cursor.lnum = pos->lnum;
5813     }
5814     curwin->w_cursor = cursor_save;
5815     return trypos;
5816 }
5817 
5818 /*
5819  * Find the matching '(', failing if it is in a comment.
5820  * Return NULL of no match found.
5821  */
5822     static pos_T *
5823 find_match_paren(ind_maxparen, ind_maxcomment)	    /* XXX */
5824     int		ind_maxparen;
5825     int		ind_maxcomment;
5826 {
5827     pos_T	cursor_save;
5828     pos_T	*trypos;
5829     static pos_T pos_copy;
5830 
5831     cursor_save = curwin->w_cursor;
5832     if ((trypos = findmatchlimit(NULL, '(', 0, ind_maxparen)) != NULL)
5833     {
5834 	/* check if the ( is in a // comment */
5835 	if ((colnr_T)cin_skip2pos(trypos) > trypos->col)
5836 	    trypos = NULL;
5837 	else
5838 	{
5839 	    pos_copy = *trypos;	    /* copy trypos, findmatch will change it */
5840 	    trypos = &pos_copy;
5841 	    curwin->w_cursor = *trypos;
5842 	    if (find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment) != NULL) /* XXX */
5843 		trypos = NULL;
5844 	}
5845     }
5846     curwin->w_cursor = cursor_save;
5847     return trypos;
5848 }
5849 
5850 /*
5851  * Return ind_maxparen corrected for the difference in line number between the
5852  * cursor position and "startpos".  This makes sure that searching for a
5853  * matching paren above the cursor line doesn't find a match because of
5854  * looking a few lines further.
5855  */
5856     static int
5857 corr_ind_maxparen(ind_maxparen, startpos)
5858     int		ind_maxparen;
5859     pos_T	*startpos;
5860 {
5861     long	n = (long)startpos->lnum - (long)curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
5862 
5863     if (n > 0 && n < ind_maxparen / 2)
5864 	return ind_maxparen - (int)n;
5865     return ind_maxparen;
5866 }
5867 
5868 /*
5869  * Set w_cursor.col to the column number of the last unmatched ')' or '{' in
5870  * line "l".
5871  */
5872     static int
5873 find_last_paren(l, start, end)
5874     char_u	*l;
5875     int		start, end;
5876 {
5877     int		i;
5878     int		retval = FALSE;
5879     int		open_count = 0;
5880 
5881     curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;		    /* default is start of line */
5882 
5883     for (i = 0; l[i]; i++)
5884     {
5885 	i = (int)(cin_skipcomment(l + i) - l); /* ignore parens in comments */
5886 	i = (int)(skip_string(l + i) - l);    /* ignore parens in quotes */
5887 	if (l[i] == start)
5888 	    ++open_count;
5889 	else if (l[i] == end)
5890 	{
5891 	    if (open_count > 0)
5892 		--open_count;
5893 	    else
5894 	    {
5895 		curwin->w_cursor.col = i;
5896 		retval = TRUE;
5897 	    }
5898 	}
5899     }
5900     return retval;
5901 }
5902 
5903     int
5904 get_c_indent()
5905 {
5906     /*
5907      * spaces from a block's opening brace the prevailing indent for that
5908      * block should be
5909      */
5910     int ind_level = curbuf->b_p_sw;
5911 
5912     /*
5913      * spaces from the edge of the line an open brace that's at the end of a
5914      * line is imagined to be.
5915      */
5916     int ind_open_imag = 0;
5917 
5918     /*
5919      * spaces from the prevailing indent for a line that is not precededof by
5920      * an opening brace.
5921      */
5922     int ind_no_brace = 0;
5923 
5924     /*
5925      * column where the first { of a function should be located }
5926      */
5927     int ind_first_open = 0;
5928 
5929     /*
5930      * spaces from the prevailing indent a leftmost open brace should be
5931      * located
5932      */
5933     int ind_open_extra = 0;
5934 
5935     /*
5936      * spaces from the matching open brace (real location for one at the left
5937      * edge; imaginary location from one that ends a line) the matching close
5938      * brace should be located
5939      */
5940     int ind_close_extra = 0;
5941 
5942     /*
5943      * spaces from the edge of the line an open brace sitting in the leftmost
5944      * column is imagined to be
5945      */
5946     int ind_open_left_imag = 0;
5947 
5948     /*
5949      * spaces from the switch() indent a "case xx" label should be located
5950      */
5951     int ind_case = curbuf->b_p_sw;
5952 
5953     /*
5954      * spaces from the "case xx:" code after a switch() should be located
5955      */
5956     int ind_case_code = curbuf->b_p_sw;
5957 
5958     /*
5959      * lineup break at end of case in switch() with case label
5960      */
5961     int ind_case_break = 0;
5962 
5963     /*
5964      * spaces from the class declaration indent a scope declaration label
5965      * should be located
5966      */
5967     int ind_scopedecl = curbuf->b_p_sw;
5968 
5969     /*
5970      * spaces from the scope declaration label code should be located
5971      */
5972     int ind_scopedecl_code = curbuf->b_p_sw;
5973 
5974     /*
5975      * amount K&R-style parameters should be indented
5976      */
5977     int ind_param = curbuf->b_p_sw;
5978 
5979     /*
5980      * amount a function type spec should be indented
5981      */
5982     int ind_func_type = curbuf->b_p_sw;
5983 
5984     /*
5985      * amount a cpp base class declaration or constructor initialization
5986      * should be indented
5987      */
5988     int ind_cpp_baseclass = curbuf->b_p_sw;
5989 
5990     /*
5991      * additional spaces beyond the prevailing indent a continuation line
5992      * should be located
5993      */
5994     int ind_continuation = curbuf->b_p_sw;
5995 
5996     /*
5997      * spaces from the indent of the line with an unclosed parentheses
5998      */
5999     int ind_unclosed = curbuf->b_p_sw * 2;
6000 
6001     /*
6002      * spaces from the indent of the line with an unclosed parentheses, which
6003      * itself is also unclosed
6004      */
6005     int ind_unclosed2 = curbuf->b_p_sw;
6006 
6007     /*
6008      * suppress ignoring spaces from the indent of a line starting with an
6009      * unclosed parentheses.
6010      */
6011     int ind_unclosed_noignore = 0;
6012 
6013     /*
6014      * If the opening paren is the last nonwhite character on the line, and
6015      * ind_unclosed_wrapped is nonzero, use this indent relative to the outer
6016      * context (for very long lines).
6017      */
6018     int ind_unclosed_wrapped = 0;
6019 
6020     /*
6021      * suppress ignoring white space when lining up with the character after
6022      * an unclosed parentheses.
6023      */
6024     int ind_unclosed_whiteok = 0;
6025 
6026     /*
6027      * indent a closing parentheses under the line start of the matching
6028      * opening parentheses.
6029      */
6030     int ind_matching_paren = 0;
6031 
6032     /*
6033      * indent a closing parentheses under the previous line.
6034      */
6035     int ind_paren_prev = 0;
6036 
6037     /*
6038      * Extra indent for comments.
6039      */
6040     int ind_comment = 0;
6041 
6042     /*
6043      * spaces from the comment opener when there is nothing after it.
6044      */
6045     int ind_in_comment = 3;
6046 
6047     /*
6048      * boolean: if non-zero, use ind_in_comment even if there is something
6049      * after the comment opener.
6050      */
6051     int ind_in_comment2 = 0;
6052 
6053     /*
6054      * max lines to search for an open paren
6055      */
6056     int ind_maxparen = 20;
6057 
6058     /*
6059      * max lines to search for an open comment
6060      */
6061     int ind_maxcomment = 70;
6062 
6063     /*
6064      * handle braces for java code
6065      */
6066     int	ind_java = 0;
6067 
6068     /*
6069      * handle blocked cases correctly
6070      */
6071     int ind_keep_case_label = 0;
6072 
6073     pos_T	cur_curpos;
6074     int		amount;
6075     int		scope_amount;
6076     int		cur_amount = MAXCOL;
6077     colnr_T	col;
6078     char_u	*theline;
6079     char_u	*linecopy;
6080     pos_T	*trypos;
6081     pos_T	*tryposBrace = NULL;
6082     pos_T	our_paren_pos;
6083     char_u	*start;
6084     int		start_brace;
6085 #define BRACE_IN_COL0		1	    /* '{' is in comumn 0 */
6086 #define BRACE_AT_START		2	    /* '{' is at start of line */
6087 #define BRACE_AT_END		3	    /* '{' is at end of line */
6088     linenr_T	ourscope;
6089     char_u	*l;
6090     char_u	*look;
6091     char_u	terminated;
6092     int		lookfor;
6093 #define LOOKFOR_INITIAL		0
6094 #define LOOKFOR_IF		1
6095 #define LOOKFOR_DO		2
6096 #define LOOKFOR_CASE		3
6097 #define LOOKFOR_ANY		4
6098 #define LOOKFOR_TERM		5
6099 #define LOOKFOR_UNTERM		6
6100 #define LOOKFOR_SCOPEDECL	7
6101 #define LOOKFOR_NOBREAK		8
6102 #define LOOKFOR_CPP_BASECLASS	9
6103 #define LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT	10
6104 
6105     int		whilelevel;
6106     linenr_T	lnum;
6107     char_u	*options;
6108     int		fraction = 0;	    /* init for GCC */
6109     int		divider;
6110     int		n;
6111     int		iscase;
6112     int		lookfor_break;
6113     int		cont_amount = 0;    /* amount for continuation line */
6114 
6115     for (options = curbuf->b_p_cino; *options; )
6116     {
6117 	l = options++;
6118 	if (*options == '-')
6119 	    ++options;
6120 	n = getdigits(&options);
6121 	divider = 0;
6122 	if (*options == '.')	    /* ".5s" means a fraction */
6123 	{
6124 	    fraction = atol((char *)++options);
6125 	    while (VIM_ISDIGIT(*options))
6126 	    {
6127 		++options;
6128 		if (divider)
6129 		    divider *= 10;
6130 		else
6131 		    divider = 10;
6132 	    }
6133 	}
6134 	if (*options == 's')	    /* "2s" means two times 'shiftwidth' */
6135 	{
6136 	    if (n == 0 && fraction == 0)
6137 		n = curbuf->b_p_sw;	/* just "s" is one 'shiftwidth' */
6138 	    else
6139 	    {
6140 		n *= curbuf->b_p_sw;
6141 		if (divider)
6142 		    n += (curbuf->b_p_sw * fraction + divider / 2) / divider;
6143 	    }
6144 	    ++options;
6145 	}
6146 	if (l[1] == '-')
6147 	    n = -n;
6148 	/* When adding an entry here, also update the default 'cinoptions' in
6149 	 * doc/indent.txt, and add explanation for it! */
6150 	switch (*l)
6151 	{
6152 	    case '>': ind_level = n; break;
6153 	    case 'e': ind_open_imag = n; break;
6154 	    case 'n': ind_no_brace = n; break;
6155 	    case 'f': ind_first_open = n; break;
6156 	    case '{': ind_open_extra = n; break;
6157 	    case '}': ind_close_extra = n; break;
6158 	    case '^': ind_open_left_imag = n; break;
6159 	    case ':': ind_case = n; break;
6160 	    case '=': ind_case_code = n; break;
6161 	    case 'b': ind_case_break = n; break;
6162 	    case 'p': ind_param = n; break;
6163 	    case 't': ind_func_type = n; break;
6164 	    case '/': ind_comment = n; break;
6165 	    case 'c': ind_in_comment = n; break;
6166 	    case 'C': ind_in_comment2 = n; break;
6167 	    case 'i': ind_cpp_baseclass = n; break;
6168 	    case '+': ind_continuation = n; break;
6169 	    case '(': ind_unclosed = n; break;
6170 	    case 'u': ind_unclosed2 = n; break;
6171 	    case 'U': ind_unclosed_noignore = n; break;
6172 	    case 'W': ind_unclosed_wrapped = n; break;
6173 	    case 'w': ind_unclosed_whiteok = n; break;
6174 	    case 'm': ind_matching_paren = n; break;
6175 	    case 'M': ind_paren_prev = n; break;
6176 	    case ')': ind_maxparen = n; break;
6177 	    case '*': ind_maxcomment = n; break;
6178 	    case 'g': ind_scopedecl = n; break;
6179 	    case 'h': ind_scopedecl_code = n; break;
6180 	    case 'j': ind_java = n; break;
6181 	    case 'l': ind_keep_case_label = n; break;
6182 	    case '#': ind_hash_comment = n; break;
6183 	}
6184     }
6185 
6186     /* remember where the cursor was when we started */
6187     cur_curpos = curwin->w_cursor;
6188 
6189     /* Get a copy of the current contents of the line.
6190      * This is required, because only the most recent line obtained with
6191      * ml_get is valid! */
6192     linecopy = vim_strsave(ml_get(cur_curpos.lnum));
6193     if (linecopy == NULL)
6194 	return 0;
6195 
6196     /*
6197      * In insert mode and the cursor is on a ')' truncate the line at the
6198      * cursor position.  We don't want to line up with the matching '(' when
6199      * inserting new stuff.
6200      * For unknown reasons the cursor might be past the end of the line, thus
6201      * check for that.
6202      */
6203     if ((State & INSERT)
6204 	    && curwin->w_cursor.col < STRLEN(linecopy)
6205 	    && linecopy[curwin->w_cursor.col] == ')')
6206 	linecopy[curwin->w_cursor.col] = NUL;
6207 
6208     theline = skipwhite(linecopy);
6209 
6210     /* move the cursor to the start of the line */
6211 
6212     curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
6213 
6214     /*
6215      * #defines and so on always go at the left when included in 'cinkeys'.
6216      */
6217     if (*theline == '#' && (*linecopy == '#' || in_cinkeys('#', ' ', TRUE)))
6218     {
6219 	amount = 0;
6220     }
6221 
6222     /*
6223      * Is it a non-case label?	Then that goes at the left margin too.
6224      */
6225     else if (cin_islabel(ind_maxcomment))	    /* XXX */
6226     {
6227 	amount = 0;
6228     }
6229 
6230     /*
6231      * If we're inside a "//" comment and there is a "//" comment in a
6232      * previous line, lineup with that one.
6233      */
6234     else if (cin_islinecomment(theline)
6235 	    && (trypos = find_line_comment()) != NULL) /* XXX */
6236     {
6237 	/* find how indented the line beginning the comment is */
6238 	getvcol(curwin, trypos, &col, NULL, NULL);
6239 	amount = col;
6240     }
6241 
6242     /*
6243      * If we're inside a comment and not looking at the start of the
6244      * comment, try using the 'comments' option.
6245      */
6246     else if (!cin_iscomment(theline)
6247 	    && (trypos = find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment)) != NULL) /* XXX */
6248     {
6249 	int	lead_start_len = 2;
6250 	int	lead_middle_len = 1;
6251 	char_u	lead_start[COM_MAX_LEN];	/* start-comment string */
6252 	char_u	lead_middle[COM_MAX_LEN];	/* middle-comment string */
6253 	char_u	lead_end[COM_MAX_LEN];		/* end-comment string */
6254 	char_u	*p;
6255 	int	start_align = 0;
6256 	int	start_off = 0;
6257 	int	done = FALSE;
6258 
6259 	/* find how indented the line beginning the comment is */
6260 	getvcol(curwin, trypos, &col, NULL, NULL);
6261 	amount = col;
6262 
6263 	p = curbuf->b_p_com;
6264 	while (*p != NUL)
6265 	{
6266 	    int	align = 0;
6267 	    int	off = 0;
6268 	    int what = 0;
6269 
6270 	    while (*p != NUL && *p != ':')
6271 	    {
6272 		if (*p == COM_START || *p == COM_END || *p == COM_MIDDLE)
6273 		    what = *p++;
6274 		else if (*p == COM_LEFT || *p == COM_RIGHT)
6275 		    align = *p++;
6276 		else if (VIM_ISDIGIT(*p) || *p == '-')
6277 		    off = getdigits(&p);
6278 		else
6279 		    ++p;
6280 	    }
6281 
6282 	    if (*p == ':')
6283 		++p;
6284 	    (void)copy_option_part(&p, lead_end, COM_MAX_LEN, ",");
6285 	    if (what == COM_START)
6286 	    {
6287 		STRCPY(lead_start, lead_end);
6288 		lead_start_len = (int)STRLEN(lead_start);
6289 		start_off = off;
6290 		start_align = align;
6291 	    }
6292 	    else if (what == COM_MIDDLE)
6293 	    {
6294 		STRCPY(lead_middle, lead_end);
6295 		lead_middle_len = (int)STRLEN(lead_middle);
6296 	    }
6297 	    else if (what == COM_END)
6298 	    {
6299 		/* If our line starts with the middle comment string, line it
6300 		 * up with the comment opener per the 'comments' option. */
6301 		if (STRNCMP(theline, lead_middle, lead_middle_len) == 0
6302 			&& STRNCMP(theline, lead_end, STRLEN(lead_end)) != 0)
6303 		{
6304 		    done = TRUE;
6305 		    if (curwin->w_cursor.lnum > 1)
6306 		    {
6307 			/* If the start comment string matches in the previous
6308 			 * line, use the indent of that line pluss offset.  If
6309 			 * the middle comment string matches in the previous
6310 			 * line, use the indent of that line.  XXX */
6311 			look = skipwhite(ml_get(curwin->w_cursor.lnum - 1));
6312 			if (STRNCMP(look, lead_start, lead_start_len) == 0)
6313 			    amount = get_indent_lnum(curwin->w_cursor.lnum - 1);
6314 			else if (STRNCMP(look, lead_middle,
6315 							lead_middle_len) == 0)
6316 			{
6317 			    amount = get_indent_lnum(curwin->w_cursor.lnum - 1);
6318 			    break;
6319 			}
6320 			/* If the start comment string doesn't match with the
6321 			 * start of the comment, skip this entry. XXX */
6322 			else if (STRNCMP(ml_get(trypos->lnum) + trypos->col,
6323 					     lead_start, lead_start_len) != 0)
6324 			    continue;
6325 		    }
6326 		    if (start_off != 0)
6327 			amount += start_off;
6328 		    else if (start_align == COM_RIGHT)
6329 			amount += vim_strsize(lead_start)
6330 						   - vim_strsize(lead_middle);
6331 		    break;
6332 		}
6333 
6334 		/* If our line starts with the end comment string, line it up
6335 		 * with the middle comment */
6336 		if (STRNCMP(theline, lead_middle, lead_middle_len) != 0
6337 			&& STRNCMP(theline, lead_end, STRLEN(lead_end)) == 0)
6338 		{
6339 		    amount = get_indent_lnum(curwin->w_cursor.lnum - 1);
6340 								     /* XXX */
6341 		    if (off != 0)
6342 			amount += off;
6343 		    else if (align == COM_RIGHT)
6344 			amount += vim_strsize(lead_start)
6345 						   - vim_strsize(lead_middle);
6346 		    done = TRUE;
6347 		    break;
6348 		}
6349 	    }
6350 	}
6351 
6352 	/* If our line starts with an asterisk, line up with the
6353 	 * asterisk in the comment opener; otherwise, line up
6354 	 * with the first character of the comment text.
6355 	 */
6356 	if (done)
6357 	    ;
6358 	else if (theline[0] == '*')
6359 	    amount += 1;
6360 	else
6361 	{
6362 	    /*
6363 	     * If we are more than one line away from the comment opener, take
6364 	     * the indent of the previous non-empty line.  If 'cino' has "CO"
6365 	     * and we are just below the comment opener and there are any
6366 	     * white characters after it line up with the text after it;
6367 	     * otherwise, add the amount specified by "c" in 'cino'
6368 	     */
6369 	    amount = -1;
6370 	    for (lnum = cur_curpos.lnum - 1; lnum > trypos->lnum; --lnum)
6371 	    {
6372 		if (linewhite(lnum))		    /* skip blank lines */
6373 		    continue;
6374 		amount = get_indent_lnum(lnum);	    /* XXX */
6375 		break;
6376 	    }
6377 	    if (amount == -1)			    /* use the comment opener */
6378 	    {
6379 		if (!ind_in_comment2)
6380 		{
6381 		    start = ml_get(trypos->lnum);
6382 		    look = start + trypos->col + 2; /* skip / and * */
6383 		    if (*look != NUL)		    /* if something after it */
6384 			trypos->col = (colnr_T)(skipwhite(look) - start);
6385 		}
6386 		getvcol(curwin, trypos, &col, NULL, NULL);
6387 		amount = col;
6388 		if (ind_in_comment2 || *look == NUL)
6389 		    amount += ind_in_comment;
6390 	    }
6391 	}
6392     }
6393 
6394     /*
6395      * Are we inside parentheses or braces?
6396      */						    /* XXX */
6397     else if (((trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen, ind_maxcomment)) != NULL
6398 		&& ind_java == 0)
6399 	    || (tryposBrace = find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment)) != NULL
6400 	    || trypos != NULL)
6401     {
6402       if (trypos != NULL && tryposBrace != NULL)
6403       {
6404 	  /* Both an unmatched '(' and '{' is found.  Use the one which is
6405 	   * closer to the current cursor position, set the other to NULL. */
6406 	  if (trypos->lnum != tryposBrace->lnum
6407 		  ? trypos->lnum < tryposBrace->lnum
6408 		  : trypos->col < tryposBrace->col)
6409 	      trypos = NULL;
6410 	  else
6411 	      tryposBrace = NULL;
6412       }
6413 
6414       if (trypos != NULL)
6415       {
6416 	/*
6417 	 * If the matching paren is more than one line away, use the indent of
6418 	 * a previous non-empty line that matches the same paren.
6419 	 */
6420 	if (theline[0] == ')' && ind_paren_prev)
6421 	{
6422 	    /* Line up with the start of the matching paren line. */
6423 	    amount = get_indent_lnum(curwin->w_cursor.lnum - 1);  /* XXX */
6424 	}
6425 	else
6426 	{
6427 	    amount = -1;
6428 	    our_paren_pos = *trypos;
6429 	    for (lnum = cur_curpos.lnum - 1; lnum > our_paren_pos.lnum; --lnum)
6430 	    {
6431 		l = skipwhite(ml_get(lnum));
6432 		if (cin_nocode(l))		/* skip comment lines */
6433 		    continue;
6434 		if (cin_ispreproc_cont(&l, &lnum))
6435 		    continue;			/* ignore #define, #if, etc. */
6436 		curwin->w_cursor.lnum = lnum;
6437 
6438 		/* Skip a comment. XXX */
6439 		if ((trypos = find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
6440 		{
6441 		    lnum = trypos->lnum + 1;
6442 		    continue;
6443 		}
6444 
6445 		/* XXX */
6446 		if ((trypos = find_match_paren(
6447 				corr_ind_maxparen(ind_maxparen, &cur_curpos),
6448 						      ind_maxcomment)) != NULL
6449 			&& trypos->lnum == our_paren_pos.lnum
6450 			&& trypos->col == our_paren_pos.col)
6451 		{
6452 			amount = get_indent_lnum(lnum);	/* XXX */
6453 
6454 			if (theline[0] == ')')
6455 			{
6456 			    if (our_paren_pos.lnum != lnum
6457 						       && cur_amount > amount)
6458 				cur_amount = amount;
6459 			    amount = -1;
6460 			}
6461 		    break;
6462 		}
6463 	    }
6464 	}
6465 
6466 	/*
6467 	 * Line up with line where the matching paren is. XXX
6468 	 * If the line starts with a '(' or the indent for unclosed
6469 	 * parentheses is zero, line up with the unclosed parentheses.
6470 	 */
6471 	if (amount == -1)
6472 	{
6473 	    int	    ignore_paren_col = 0;
6474 
6475 	    amount = skip_label(our_paren_pos.lnum, &look, ind_maxcomment);
6476 	    look = skipwhite(look);
6477 	    if (*look == '(')
6478 	    {
6479 		linenr_T    save_lnum = curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
6480 		char_u	    *line;
6481 		int	    look_col;
6482 
6483 		/* Ignore a '(' in front of the line that has a match before
6484 		 * our matching '('. */
6485 		curwin->w_cursor.lnum = our_paren_pos.lnum;
6486 		line = ml_get_curline();
6487 		look_col = (int)(look - line);
6488 		curwin->w_cursor.col = look_col + 1;
6489 		if ((trypos = findmatchlimit(NULL, ')', 0, ind_maxparen))
6490 								      != NULL
6491 			  && trypos->lnum == our_paren_pos.lnum
6492 			  && trypos->col < our_paren_pos.col)
6493 		    ignore_paren_col = trypos->col + 1;
6494 
6495 		curwin->w_cursor.lnum = save_lnum;
6496 		look = ml_get(our_paren_pos.lnum) + look_col;
6497 	    }
6498 	    if (theline[0] == ')' || ind_unclosed == 0
6499 		    || (!ind_unclosed_noignore && *look == '('
6500 						    && ignore_paren_col == 0))
6501 	    {
6502 		/*
6503 		 * If we're looking at a close paren, line up right there;
6504 		 * otherwise, line up with the next (non-white) character.
6505 		 * When ind_unclosed_wrapped is set and the matching paren is
6506 		 * the last nonwhite character of the line, use either the
6507 		 * indent of the current line or the indentation of the next
6508 		 * outer paren and add ind_unclosed_wrapped (for very long
6509 		 * lines).
6510 		 */
6511 		if (theline[0] != ')')
6512 		{
6513 		    cur_amount = MAXCOL;
6514 		    l = ml_get(our_paren_pos.lnum);
6515 		    if (ind_unclosed_wrapped
6516 				       && cin_ends_in(l, (char_u *)"(", NULL))
6517 		    {
6518 			/* look for opening unmatched paren, indent one level
6519 			 * for each additional level */
6520 			n = 1;
6521 			for (col = 0; col < our_paren_pos.col; ++col)
6522 			{
6523 			    switch (l[col])
6524 			    {
6525 				case '(':
6526 				case '{': ++n;
6527 					  break;
6528 
6529 				case ')':
6530 				case '}': if (n > 1)
6531 					      --n;
6532 					  break;
6533 			    }
6534 			}
6535 
6536 			our_paren_pos.col = 0;
6537 			amount += n * ind_unclosed_wrapped;
6538 		    }
6539 		    else if (ind_unclosed_whiteok)
6540 			our_paren_pos.col++;
6541 		    else
6542 		    {
6543 			col = our_paren_pos.col + 1;
6544 			while (vim_iswhite(l[col]))
6545 			    col++;
6546 			if (l[col] != NUL)	/* In case of trailing space */
6547 			    our_paren_pos.col = col;
6548 			else
6549 			    our_paren_pos.col++;
6550 		    }
6551 		}
6552 
6553 		/*
6554 		 * Find how indented the paren is, or the character after it
6555 		 * if we did the above "if".
6556 		 */
6557 		if (our_paren_pos.col > 0)
6558 		{
6559 		    getvcol(curwin, &our_paren_pos, &col, NULL, NULL);
6560 		    if (cur_amount > (int)col)
6561 			cur_amount = col;
6562 		}
6563 	    }
6564 
6565 	    if (theline[0] == ')' && ind_matching_paren)
6566 	    {
6567 		/* Line up with the start of the matching paren line. */
6568 	    }
6569 	    else if (ind_unclosed == 0 || (!ind_unclosed_noignore
6570 				    && *look == '(' && ignore_paren_col == 0))
6571 	    {
6572 		if (cur_amount != MAXCOL)
6573 		    amount = cur_amount;
6574 	    }
6575 	    else
6576 	    {
6577 		/* Add ind_unclosed2 for each '(' before our matching one, but
6578 		 * ignore (void) before the line (ignore_paren_col). */
6579 		col = our_paren_pos.col;
6580 		while ((int)our_paren_pos.col > ignore_paren_col)
6581 		{
6582 		    --our_paren_pos.col;
6583 		    switch (*ml_get_pos(&our_paren_pos))
6584 		    {
6585 			case '(': amount += ind_unclosed2;
6586 				  col = our_paren_pos.col;
6587 				  break;
6588 			case ')': amount -= ind_unclosed2;
6589 				  col = MAXCOL;
6590 				  break;
6591 		    }
6592 		}
6593 
6594 		/* Use ind_unclosed once, when the first '(' is not inside
6595 		 * braces */
6596 		if (col == MAXCOL)
6597 		    amount += ind_unclosed;
6598 		else
6599 		{
6600 		    curwin->w_cursor.lnum = our_paren_pos.lnum;
6601 		    curwin->w_cursor.col = col;
6602 		    if ((trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen,
6603 						     ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
6604 			amount += ind_unclosed2;
6605 		    else
6606 			amount += ind_unclosed;
6607 		}
6608 		/*
6609 		 * For a line starting with ')' use the minimum of the two
6610 		 * positions, to avoid giving it more indent than the previous
6611 		 * lines:
6612 		 *  func_long_name(		    if (x
6613 		 *	arg				    && yy
6614 		 *	)	  ^ not here	       )    ^ not here
6615 		 */
6616 		if (cur_amount < amount)
6617 		    amount = cur_amount;
6618 	    }
6619 	}
6620 
6621 	/* add extra indent for a comment */
6622 	if (cin_iscomment(theline))
6623 	    amount += ind_comment;
6624       }
6625 
6626       /*
6627        * Are we at least inside braces, then?
6628        */
6629       else
6630       {
6631 	trypos = tryposBrace;
6632 
6633 	ourscope = trypos->lnum;
6634 	start = ml_get(ourscope);
6635 
6636 	/*
6637 	 * Now figure out how indented the line is in general.
6638 	 * If the brace was at the start of the line, we use that;
6639 	 * otherwise, check out the indentation of the line as
6640 	 * a whole and then add the "imaginary indent" to that.
6641 	 */
6642 	look = skipwhite(start);
6643 	if (*look == '{')
6644 	{
6645 	    getvcol(curwin, trypos, &col, NULL, NULL);
6646 	    amount = col;
6647 	    if (*start == '{')
6648 		start_brace = BRACE_IN_COL0;
6649 	    else
6650 		start_brace = BRACE_AT_START;
6651 	}
6652 	else
6653 	{
6654 	    /*
6655 	     * that opening brace might have been on a continuation
6656 	     * line.  if so, find the start of the line.
6657 	     */
6658 	    curwin->w_cursor.lnum = ourscope;
6659 
6660 	    /*
6661 	     * position the cursor over the rightmost paren, so that
6662 	     * matching it will take us back to the start of the line.
6663 	     */
6664 	    lnum = ourscope;
6665 	    if (find_last_paren(start, '(', ')')
6666 		    && (trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen,
6667 						     ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
6668 		lnum = trypos->lnum;
6669 
6670 	    /*
6671 	     * It could have been something like
6672 	     *	   case 1: if (asdf &&
6673 	     *			ldfd) {
6674 	     *		    }
6675 	     */
6676 	    if (ind_keep_case_label && cin_iscase(skipwhite(ml_get_curline())))
6677 		amount = get_indent();
6678 	    else
6679 		amount = skip_label(lnum, &l, ind_maxcomment);
6680 
6681 	    start_brace = BRACE_AT_END;
6682 	}
6683 
6684 	/*
6685 	 * if we're looking at a closing brace, that's where
6686 	 * we want to be.  otherwise, add the amount of room
6687 	 * that an indent is supposed to be.
6688 	 */
6689 	if (theline[0] == '}')
6690 	{
6691 	    /*
6692 	     * they may want closing braces to line up with something
6693 	     * other than the open brace.  indulge them, if so.
6694 	     */
6695 	    amount += ind_close_extra;
6696 	}
6697 	else
6698 	{
6699 	    /*
6700 	     * If we're looking at an "else", try to find an "if"
6701 	     * to match it with.
6702 	     * If we're looking at a "while", try to find a "do"
6703 	     * to match it with.
6704 	     */
6705 	    lookfor = LOOKFOR_INITIAL;
6706 	    if (cin_iselse(theline))
6707 		lookfor = LOOKFOR_IF;
6708 	    else if (cin_iswhileofdo(theline, cur_curpos.lnum, ind_maxparen))
6709 								    /* XXX */
6710 		lookfor = LOOKFOR_DO;
6711 	    if (lookfor != LOOKFOR_INITIAL)
6712 	    {
6713 		curwin->w_cursor.lnum = cur_curpos.lnum;
6714 		if (find_match(lookfor, ourscope, ind_maxparen,
6715 							ind_maxcomment) == OK)
6716 		{
6717 		    amount = get_indent();	/* XXX */
6718 		    goto theend;
6719 		}
6720 	    }
6721 
6722 	    /*
6723 	     * We get here if we are not on an "while-of-do" or "else" (or
6724 	     * failed to find a matching "if").
6725 	     * Search backwards for something to line up with.
6726 	     * First set amount for when we don't find anything.
6727 	     */
6728 
6729 	    /*
6730 	     * if the '{' is  _really_ at the left margin, use the imaginary
6731 	     * location of a left-margin brace.  Otherwise, correct the
6732 	     * location for ind_open_extra.
6733 	     */
6734 
6735 	    if (start_brace == BRACE_IN_COL0)	    /* '{' is in column 0 */
6736 	    {
6737 		amount = ind_open_left_imag;
6738 	    }
6739 	    else
6740 	    {
6741 		if (start_brace == BRACE_AT_END)    /* '{' is at end of line */
6742 		    amount += ind_open_imag;
6743 		else
6744 		{
6745 		    /* Compensate for adding ind_open_extra later. */
6746 		    amount -= ind_open_extra;
6747 		    if (amount < 0)
6748 			amount = 0;
6749 		}
6750 	    }
6751 
6752 	    lookfor_break = FALSE;
6753 
6754 	    if (cin_iscase(theline))	/* it's a switch() label */
6755 	    {
6756 		lookfor = LOOKFOR_CASE;	/* find a previous switch() label */
6757 		amount += ind_case;
6758 	    }
6759 	    else if (cin_isscopedecl(theline))	/* private:, ... */
6760 	    {
6761 		lookfor = LOOKFOR_SCOPEDECL;	/* class decl is this block */
6762 		amount += ind_scopedecl;
6763 	    }
6764 	    else
6765 	    {
6766 		if (ind_case_break && cin_isbreak(theline))	/* break; ... */
6767 		    lookfor_break = TRUE;
6768 
6769 		lookfor = LOOKFOR_INITIAL;
6770 		amount += ind_level;	/* ind_level from start of block */
6771 	    }
6772 	    scope_amount = amount;
6773 	    whilelevel = 0;
6774 
6775 	    /*
6776 	     * Search backwards.  If we find something we recognize, line up
6777 	     * with that.
6778 	     *
6779 	     * if we're looking at an open brace, indent
6780 	     * the usual amount relative to the conditional
6781 	     * that opens the block.
6782 	     */
6783 	    curwin->w_cursor = cur_curpos;
6784 	    for (;;)
6785 	    {
6786 		curwin->w_cursor.lnum--;
6787 		curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
6788 
6789 		/*
6790 		 * If we went all the way back to the start of our scope, line
6791 		 * up with it.
6792 		 */
6793 		if (curwin->w_cursor.lnum <= ourscope)
6794 		{
6795 		    /* we reached end of scope:
6796 		     * if looking for a enum or structure initialization
6797 		     * go further back:
6798 		     * if it is an initializer (enum xxx or xxx =), then
6799 		     * don't add ind_continuation, otherwise it is a variable
6800 		     * declaration:
6801 		     * int x,
6802 		     *     here; <-- add ind_continuation
6803 		     */
6804 		    if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT)
6805 		    {
6806 			if (curwin->w_cursor.lnum == 0
6807 				|| curwin->w_cursor.lnum
6808 						    < ourscope - ind_maxparen)
6809 			{
6810 			    /* nothing found (abuse ind_maxparen as limit)
6811 			     * assume terminated line (i.e. a variable
6812 			     * initialization) */
6813 			    if (cont_amount > 0)
6814 				amount = cont_amount;
6815 			    else
6816 				amount += ind_continuation;
6817 			    break;
6818 			}
6819 
6820 			l = ml_get_curline();
6821 
6822 			/*
6823 			 * If we're in a comment now, skip to the start of the
6824 			 * comment.
6825 			 */
6826 			trypos = find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment);
6827 			if (trypos != NULL)
6828 			{
6829 			    curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum + 1;
6830 			    continue;
6831 			}
6832 
6833 			/*
6834 			 * Skip preprocessor directives and blank lines.
6835 			 */
6836 			if (cin_ispreproc_cont(&l, &curwin->w_cursor.lnum))
6837 			    continue;
6838 
6839 			if (cin_nocode(l))
6840 			    continue;
6841 
6842 			terminated = cin_isterminated(l, FALSE, TRUE);
6843 
6844 			/*
6845 			 * If we are at top level and the line looks like a
6846 			 * function declaration, we are done
6847 			 * (it's a variable declaration).
6848 			 */
6849 			if (start_brace != BRACE_IN_COL0
6850 				|| !cin_isfuncdecl(&l, curwin->w_cursor.lnum))
6851 			{
6852 			    /* if the line is terminated with another ','
6853 			     * it is a continued variable initialization.
6854 			     * don't add extra indent.
6855 			     * TODO: does not work, if  a function
6856 			     * declaration is split over multiple lines:
6857 			     * cin_isfuncdecl returns FALSE then.
6858 			     */
6859 			    if (terminated == ',')
6860 				break;
6861 
6862 			    /* if it es a enum declaration or an assignment,
6863 			     * we are done.
6864 			     */
6865 			    if (terminated != ';' && cin_isinit())
6866 				break;
6867 
6868 			    /* nothing useful found */
6869 			    if (terminated == 0 || terminated == '{')
6870 				continue;
6871 			}
6872 
6873 			if (terminated != ';')
6874 			{
6875 			    /* Skip parens and braces. Position the cursor
6876 			     * over the rightmost paren, so that matching it
6877 			     * will take us back to the start of the line.
6878 			     */					/* XXX */
6879 			    trypos = NULL;
6880 			    if (find_last_paren(l, '(', ')'))
6881 				trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen,
6882 					ind_maxcomment);
6883 
6884 			    if (trypos == NULL && find_last_paren(l, '{', '}'))
6885 				trypos = find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment);
6886 
6887 			    if (trypos != NULL)
6888 			    {
6889 				curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum + 1;
6890 				continue;
6891 			    }
6892 			}
6893 
6894 			/* it's a variable declaration, add indentation
6895 			 * like in
6896 			 * int a,
6897 			 *    b;
6898 			 */
6899 			if (cont_amount > 0)
6900 			    amount = cont_amount;
6901 			else
6902 			    amount += ind_continuation;
6903 		    }
6904 		    else if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_UNTERM)
6905 		    {
6906 			if (cont_amount > 0)
6907 			    amount = cont_amount;
6908 			else
6909 			    amount += ind_continuation;
6910 		    }
6911 		    else if (lookfor != LOOKFOR_TERM
6912 					  && lookfor != LOOKFOR_CPP_BASECLASS)
6913 		    {
6914 			amount = scope_amount;
6915 			if (theline[0] == '{')
6916 			    amount += ind_open_extra;
6917 		    }
6918 		    break;
6919 		}
6920 
6921 		/*
6922 		 * If we're in a comment now, skip to the start of the comment.
6923 		 */					    /* XXX */
6924 		if ((trypos = find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
6925 		{
6926 		    curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum + 1;
6927 		    continue;
6928 		}
6929 
6930 		l = ml_get_curline();
6931 
6932 		/*
6933 		 * If this is a switch() label, may line up relative to that.
6934 		 * If this is a C++ scope declaration, do the same.
6935 		 */
6936 		iscase = cin_iscase(l);
6937 		if (iscase || cin_isscopedecl(l))
6938 		{
6939 		    /* we are only looking for cpp base class
6940 		     * declaration/initialization any longer */
6941 		    if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_CPP_BASECLASS)
6942 			break;
6943 
6944 		    /* When looking for a "do" we are not interested in
6945 		     * labels. */
6946 		    if (whilelevel > 0)
6947 			continue;
6948 
6949 		    /*
6950 		     *	case xx:
6951 		     *	    c = 99 +	    <- this indent plus continuation
6952 		     *->	   here;
6953 		     */
6954 		    if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_UNTERM
6955 					   || lookfor == LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT)
6956 		    {
6957 			if (cont_amount > 0)
6958 			    amount = cont_amount;
6959 			else
6960 			    amount += ind_continuation;
6961 			break;
6962 		    }
6963 
6964 		    /*
6965 		     *	case xx:	<- line up with this case
6966 		     *	    x = 333;
6967 		     *	case yy:
6968 		     */
6969 		    if (       (iscase && lookfor == LOOKFOR_CASE)
6970 			    || (iscase && lookfor_break)
6971 			    || (!iscase && lookfor == LOOKFOR_SCOPEDECL))
6972 		    {
6973 			/*
6974 			 * Check that this case label is not for another
6975 			 * switch()
6976 			 */				    /* XXX */
6977 			if ((trypos = find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment)) ==
6978 					     NULL || trypos->lnum == ourscope)
6979 			{
6980 			    amount = get_indent();	/* XXX */
6981 			    break;
6982 			}
6983 			continue;
6984 		    }
6985 
6986 		    n = get_indent_nolabel(curwin->w_cursor.lnum);  /* XXX */
6987 
6988 		    /*
6989 		     *	 case xx: if (cond)	    <- line up with this if
6990 		     *		      y = y + 1;
6991 		     * ->	  s = 99;
6992 		     *
6993 		     *	 case xx:
6994 		     *	     if (cond)		<- line up with this line
6995 		     *		 y = y + 1;
6996 		     * ->    s = 99;
6997 		     */
6998 		    if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_TERM)
6999 		    {
7000 			if (n)
7001 			    amount = n;
7002 
7003 			if (!lookfor_break)
7004 			    break;
7005 		    }
7006 
7007 		    /*
7008 		     *	 case xx: x = x + 1;	    <- line up with this x
7009 		     * ->	  y = y + 1;
7010 		     *
7011 		     *	 case xx: if (cond)	    <- line up with this if
7012 		     * ->	       y = y + 1;
7013 		     */
7014 		    if (n)
7015 		    {
7016 			amount = n;
7017 			l = after_label(ml_get_curline());
7018 			if (l != NULL && cin_is_cinword(l))
7019 			{
7020 			    if (theline[0] == '{')
7021 				amount += ind_open_extra;
7022 			    else
7023 				amount += ind_level + ind_no_brace;
7024 			}
7025 			break;
7026 		    }
7027 
7028 		    /*
7029 		     * Try to get the indent of a statement before the switch
7030 		     * label.  If nothing is found, line up relative to the
7031 		     * switch label.
7032 		     *	    break;		<- may line up with this line
7033 		     *	 case xx:
7034 		     * ->   y = 1;
7035 		     */
7036 		    scope_amount = get_indent() + (iscase    /* XXX */
7037 					? ind_case_code : ind_scopedecl_code);
7038 		    lookfor = ind_case_break ? LOOKFOR_NOBREAK : LOOKFOR_ANY;
7039 		    continue;
7040 		}
7041 
7042 		/*
7043 		 * Looking for a switch() label or C++ scope declaration,
7044 		 * ignore other lines, skip {}-blocks.
7045 		 */
7046 		if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_CASE || lookfor == LOOKFOR_SCOPEDECL)
7047 		{
7048 		    if (find_last_paren(l, '{', '}') && (trypos =
7049 				    find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
7050 			curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum + 1;
7051 		    continue;
7052 		}
7053 
7054 		/*
7055 		 * Ignore jump labels with nothing after them.
7056 		 */
7057 		if (cin_islabel(ind_maxcomment))
7058 		{
7059 		    l = after_label(ml_get_curline());
7060 		    if (l == NULL || cin_nocode(l))
7061 			continue;
7062 		}
7063 
7064 		/*
7065 		 * Ignore #defines, #if, etc.
7066 		 * Ignore comment and empty lines.
7067 		 * (need to get the line again, cin_islabel() may have
7068 		 * unlocked it)
7069 		 */
7070 		l = ml_get_curline();
7071 		if (cin_ispreproc_cont(&l, &curwin->w_cursor.lnum)
7072 							     || cin_nocode(l))
7073 		    continue;
7074 
7075 		/*
7076 		 * Are we at the start of a cpp base class declaration or
7077 		 * constructor initialization?
7078 		 */						    /* XXX */
7079 		n = FALSE;
7080 		if (lookfor != LOOKFOR_TERM && ind_cpp_baseclass > 0)
7081 		{
7082 		    n = cin_is_cpp_baseclass(l, &col);
7083 		    l = ml_get_curline();
7084 		}
7085 		if (n)
7086 		{
7087 		    if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_UNTERM)
7088 		    {
7089 			if (cont_amount > 0)
7090 			    amount = cont_amount;
7091 			else
7092 			    amount += ind_continuation;
7093 		    }
7094 		    else if (theline[0] == '{')
7095 		    {
7096 			/* Need to find start of the declaration. */
7097 			lookfor = LOOKFOR_UNTERM;
7098 			ind_continuation = 0;
7099 			continue;
7100 		    }
7101 		    else
7102 								     /* XXX */
7103 			amount = get_baseclass_amount(col, ind_maxparen,
7104 					   ind_maxcomment, ind_cpp_baseclass);
7105 		    break;
7106 		}
7107 		else if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_CPP_BASECLASS)
7108 		{
7109 		    /* only look, whether there is a cpp base class
7110 		     * declaration or initialization before the opening brace.
7111 		     */
7112 		    if (cin_isterminated(l, TRUE, FALSE))
7113 			break;
7114 		    else
7115 			continue;
7116 		}
7117 
7118 		/*
7119 		 * What happens next depends on the line being terminated.
7120 		 * If terminated with a ',' only consider it terminating if
7121 		 * there is anoter unterminated statement behind, eg:
7122 		 *   123,
7123 		 *   sizeof
7124 		 *	  here
7125 		 * Otherwise check whether it is a enumeration or structure
7126 		 * initialisation (not indented) or a variable declaration
7127 		 * (indented).
7128 		 */
7129 		terminated = cin_isterminated(l, FALSE, TRUE);
7130 
7131 		if (terminated == 0 || (lookfor != LOOKFOR_UNTERM
7132 							&& terminated == ','))
7133 		{
7134 		    /*
7135 		     * if we're in the middle of a paren thing,
7136 		     * go back to the line that starts it so
7137 		     * we can get the right prevailing indent
7138 		     *	   if ( foo &&
7139 		     *		    bar )
7140 		     */
7141 		    /*
7142 		     * position the cursor over the rightmost paren, so that
7143 		     * matching it will take us back to the start of the line.
7144 		     */
7145 		    (void)find_last_paren(l, '(', ')');
7146 		    trypos = find_match_paren(
7147 				 corr_ind_maxparen(ind_maxparen, &cur_curpos),
7148 							      ind_maxcomment);
7149 
7150 		    /*
7151 		     * If we are looking for ',', we also look for matching
7152 		     * braces.
7153 		     */
7154 		    if (trypos == NULL && terminated == ','
7155 					      && find_last_paren(l, '{', '}'))
7156 			trypos = find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment);
7157 
7158 		    if (trypos != NULL)
7159 		    {
7160 			/*
7161 			 * Check if we are on a case label now.  This is
7162 			 * handled above.
7163 			 *     case xx:  if ( asdf &&
7164 			 *			asdf)
7165 			 */
7166 			curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum;
7167 			l = ml_get_curline();
7168 			if (cin_iscase(l) || cin_isscopedecl(l))
7169 			{
7170 			    ++curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
7171 			    continue;
7172 			}
7173 		    }
7174 
7175 		    /*
7176 		     * Skip over continuation lines to find the one to get the
7177 		     * indent from
7178 		     * char *usethis = "bla\
7179 		     *		 bla",
7180 		     *      here;
7181 		     */
7182 		    if (terminated == ',')
7183 		    {
7184 			while (curwin->w_cursor.lnum > 1)
7185 			{
7186 			    l = ml_get(curwin->w_cursor.lnum - 1);
7187 			    if (*l == NUL || l[STRLEN(l) - 1] != '\\')
7188 				break;
7189 			    --curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
7190 			}
7191 		    }
7192 
7193 		    /*
7194 		     * Get indent and pointer to text for current line,
7195 		     * ignoring any jump label.	    XXX
7196 		     */
7197 		    cur_amount = skip_label(curwin->w_cursor.lnum,
7198 							  &l, ind_maxcomment);
7199 
7200 		    /*
7201 		     * If this is just above the line we are indenting, and it
7202 		     * starts with a '{', line it up with this line.
7203 		     *		while (not)
7204 		     * ->	{
7205 		     *		}
7206 		     */
7207 		    if (terminated != ',' && lookfor != LOOKFOR_TERM
7208 							 && theline[0] == '{')
7209 		    {
7210 			amount = cur_amount;
7211 			/*
7212 			 * Only add ind_open_extra when the current line
7213 			 * doesn't start with a '{', which must have a match
7214 			 * in the same line (scope is the same).  Probably:
7215 			 *	{ 1, 2 },
7216 			 * ->	{ 3, 4 }
7217 			 */
7218 			if (*skipwhite(l) != '{')
7219 			    amount += ind_open_extra;
7220 
7221 			if (ind_cpp_baseclass)
7222 			{
7223 			    /* have to look back, whether it is a cpp base
7224 			     * class declaration or initialization */
7225 			    lookfor = LOOKFOR_CPP_BASECLASS;
7226 			    continue;
7227 			}
7228 			break;
7229 		    }
7230 
7231 		    /*
7232 		     * Check if we are after an "if", "while", etc.
7233 		     * Also allow "   } else".
7234 		     */
7235 		    if (cin_is_cinword(l) || cin_iselse(skipwhite(l)))
7236 		    {
7237 			/*
7238 			 * Found an unterminated line after an if (), line up
7239 			 * with the last one.
7240 			 *   if (cond)
7241 			 *	    100 +
7242 			 * ->		here;
7243 			 */
7244 			if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_UNTERM
7245 					   || lookfor == LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT)
7246 			{
7247 			    if (cont_amount > 0)
7248 				amount = cont_amount;
7249 			    else
7250 				amount += ind_continuation;
7251 			    break;
7252 			}
7253 
7254 			/*
7255 			 * If this is just above the line we are indenting, we
7256 			 * are finished.
7257 			 *	    while (not)
7258 			 * ->		here;
7259 			 * Otherwise this indent can be used when the line
7260 			 * before this is terminated.
7261 			 *	yyy;
7262 			 *	if (stat)
7263 			 *	    while (not)
7264 			 *		xxx;
7265 			 * ->	here;
7266 			 */
7267 			amount = cur_amount;
7268 			if (theline[0] == '{')
7269 			    amount += ind_open_extra;
7270 			if (lookfor != LOOKFOR_TERM)
7271 			{
7272 			    amount += ind_level + ind_no_brace;
7273 			    break;
7274 			}
7275 
7276 			/*
7277 			 * Special trick: when expecting the while () after a
7278 			 * do, line up with the while()
7279 			 *     do
7280 			 *	    x = 1;
7281 			 * ->  here
7282 			 */
7283 			l = skipwhite(ml_get_curline());
7284 			if (cin_isdo(l))
7285 			{
7286 			    if (whilelevel == 0)
7287 				break;
7288 			    --whilelevel;
7289 			}
7290 
7291 			/*
7292 			 * When searching for a terminated line, don't use the
7293 			 * one between the "if" and the "else".
7294 			 * Need to use the scope of this "else".  XXX
7295 			 * If whilelevel != 0 continue looking for a "do {".
7296 			 */
7297 			if (cin_iselse(l)
7298 				&& whilelevel == 0
7299 				&& ((trypos = find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment))
7300 								    == NULL
7301 				    || find_match(LOOKFOR_IF, trypos->lnum,
7302 					ind_maxparen, ind_maxcomment) == FAIL))
7303 			    break;
7304 		    }
7305 
7306 		    /*
7307 		     * If we're below an unterminated line that is not an
7308 		     * "if" or something, we may line up with this line or
7309 		     * add someting for a continuation line, depending on
7310 		     * the line before this one.
7311 		     */
7312 		    else
7313 		    {
7314 			/*
7315 			 * Found two unterminated lines on a row, line up with
7316 			 * the last one.
7317 			 *   c = 99 +
7318 			 *	    100 +
7319 			 * ->	    here;
7320 			 */
7321 			if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_UNTERM)
7322 			{
7323 			    /* When line ends in a comma add extra indent */
7324 			    if (terminated == ',')
7325 				amount += ind_continuation;
7326 			    break;
7327 			}
7328 
7329 			if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT)
7330 			{
7331 			    /* Found two lines ending in ',', lineup with the
7332 			     * lowest one, but check for cpp base class
7333 			     * declaration/initialization, if it is an
7334 			     * opening brace or we are looking just for
7335 			     * enumerations/initializations. */
7336 			    if (terminated == ',')
7337 			    {
7338 				if (ind_cpp_baseclass == 0)
7339 				    break;
7340 
7341 				lookfor = LOOKFOR_CPP_BASECLASS;
7342 				continue;
7343 			    }
7344 
7345 			    /* Ignore unterminated lines in between, but
7346 			     * reduce indent. */
7347 			    if (amount > cur_amount)
7348 				amount = cur_amount;
7349 			}
7350 			else
7351 			{
7352 			    /*
7353 			     * Found first unterminated line on a row, may
7354 			     * line up with this line, remember its indent
7355 			     *	    100 +
7356 			     * ->	    here;
7357 			     */
7358 			    amount = cur_amount;
7359 
7360 			    /*
7361 			     * If previous line ends in ',', check whether we
7362 			     * are in an initialization or enum
7363 			     * struct xxx =
7364 			     * {
7365 			     *      sizeof a,
7366 			     *      124 };
7367 			     * or a normal possible continuation line.
7368 			     * but only, of no other statement has been found
7369 			     * yet.
7370 			     */
7371 			    if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_INITIAL && terminated == ',')
7372 			    {
7373 				lookfor = LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT;
7374 				cont_amount = cin_first_id_amount();
7375 			    }
7376 			    else
7377 			    {
7378 				if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_INITIAL
7379 					&& *l != NUL
7380 					&& l[STRLEN(l) - 1] == '\\')
7381 								/* XXX */
7382 				    cont_amount = cin_get_equal_amount(
7383 						       curwin->w_cursor.lnum);
7384 				if (lookfor != LOOKFOR_TERM)
7385 				    lookfor = LOOKFOR_UNTERM;
7386 			    }
7387 			}
7388 		    }
7389 		}
7390 
7391 		/*
7392 		 * Check if we are after a while (cond);
7393 		 * If so: Ignore until the matching "do".
7394 		 */
7395 							/* XXX */
7396 		else if (cin_iswhileofdo_end(terminated, ind_maxparen,
7397 							      ind_maxcomment))
7398 		{
7399 		    /*
7400 		     * Found an unterminated line after a while ();, line up
7401 		     * with the last one.
7402 		     *	    while (cond);
7403 		     *	    100 +		<- line up with this one
7404 		     * ->	    here;
7405 		     */
7406 		    if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_UNTERM
7407 					   || lookfor == LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT)
7408 		    {
7409 			if (cont_amount > 0)
7410 			    amount = cont_amount;
7411 			else
7412 			    amount += ind_continuation;
7413 			break;
7414 		    }
7415 
7416 		    if (whilelevel == 0)
7417 		    {
7418 			lookfor = LOOKFOR_TERM;
7419 			amount = get_indent();	    /* XXX */
7420 			if (theline[0] == '{')
7421 			    amount += ind_open_extra;
7422 		    }
7423 		    ++whilelevel;
7424 		}
7425 
7426 		/*
7427 		 * We are after a "normal" statement.
7428 		 * If we had another statement we can stop now and use the
7429 		 * indent of that other statement.
7430 		 * Otherwise the indent of the current statement may be used,
7431 		 * search backwards for the next "normal" statement.
7432 		 */
7433 		else
7434 		{
7435 		    /*
7436 		     * Skip single break line, if before a switch label. It
7437 		     * may be lined up with the case label.
7438 		     */
7439 		    if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_NOBREAK
7440 				  && cin_isbreak(skipwhite(ml_get_curline())))
7441 		    {
7442 			lookfor = LOOKFOR_ANY;
7443 			continue;
7444 		    }
7445 
7446 		    /*
7447 		     * Handle "do {" line.
7448 		     */
7449 		    if (whilelevel > 0)
7450 		    {
7451 			l = cin_skipcomment(ml_get_curline());
7452 			if (cin_isdo(l))
7453 			{
7454 			    amount = get_indent();	/* XXX */
7455 			    --whilelevel;
7456 			    continue;
7457 			}
7458 		    }
7459 
7460 		    /*
7461 		     * Found a terminated line above an unterminated line. Add
7462 		     * the amount for a continuation line.
7463 		     *	 x = 1;
7464 		     *	 y = foo +
7465 		     * ->	here;
7466 		     * or
7467 		     *	 int x = 1;
7468 		     *	 int foo,
7469 		     * ->	here;
7470 		     */
7471 		    if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_UNTERM
7472 					   || lookfor == LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT)
7473 		    {
7474 			if (cont_amount > 0)
7475 			    amount = cont_amount;
7476 			else
7477 			    amount += ind_continuation;
7478 			break;
7479 		    }
7480 
7481 		    /*
7482 		     * Found a terminated line above a terminated line or "if"
7483 		     * etc. line. Use the amount of the line below us.
7484 		     *	 x = 1;				x = 1;
7485 		     *	 if (asdf)		    y = 2;
7486 		     *	     while (asdf)	  ->here;
7487 		     *		here;
7488 		     * ->foo;
7489 		     */
7490 		    if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_TERM)
7491 		    {
7492 			if (!lookfor_break && whilelevel == 0)
7493 			    break;
7494 		    }
7495 
7496 		    /*
7497 		     * First line above the one we're indenting is terminated.
7498 		     * To know what needs to be done look further backward for
7499 		     * a terminated line.
7500 		     */
7501 		    else
7502 		    {
7503 			/*
7504 			 * position the cursor over the rightmost paren, so
7505 			 * that matching it will take us back to the start of
7506 			 * the line.  Helps for:
7507 			 *     func(asdr,
7508 			 *	      asdfasdf);
7509 			 *     here;
7510 			 */
7511 term_again:
7512 			l = ml_get_curline();
7513 			if (find_last_paren(l, '(', ')')
7514 				&& (trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen,
7515 						     ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
7516 			{
7517 			    /*
7518 			     * Check if we are on a case label now.  This is
7519 			     * handled above.
7520 			     *	   case xx:  if ( asdf &&
7521 			     *			    asdf)
7522 			     */
7523 			    curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum;
7524 			    l = ml_get_curline();
7525 			    if (cin_iscase(l) || cin_isscopedecl(l))
7526 			    {
7527 				++curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
7528 				continue;
7529 			    }
7530 			}
7531 
7532 			/* When aligning with the case statement, don't align
7533 			 * with a statement after it.
7534 			 *  case 1: {   <-- don't use this { position
7535 			 *	stat;
7536 			 *  }
7537 			 *  case 2:
7538 			 *	stat;
7539 			 * }
7540 			 */
7541 			iscase = (ind_keep_case_label && cin_iscase(l));
7542 
7543 			/*
7544 			 * Get indent and pointer to text for current line,
7545 			 * ignoring any jump label.
7546 			 */
7547 			amount = skip_label(curwin->w_cursor.lnum,
7548 							  &l, ind_maxcomment);
7549 
7550 			if (theline[0] == '{')
7551 			    amount += ind_open_extra;
7552 			/* See remark above: "Only add ind_open_extra.." */
7553 			l = skipwhite(l);
7554 			if (*l == '{')
7555 			    amount -= ind_open_extra;
7556 			lookfor = iscase ? LOOKFOR_ANY : LOOKFOR_TERM;
7557 
7558 			/*
7559 			 * When a terminated line starts with "else" skip to
7560 			 * the matching "if":
7561 			 *       else 3;
7562 			 *	     indent this;
7563 			 * Need to use the scope of this "else".  XXX
7564 			 * If whilelevel != 0 continue looking for a "do {".
7565 			 */
7566 			if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_TERM
7567 				&& *l != '}'
7568 				&& cin_iselse(l)
7569 				&& whilelevel == 0)
7570 			{
7571 			    if ((trypos = find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment))
7572 								       == NULL
7573 				    || find_match(LOOKFOR_IF, trypos->lnum,
7574 					ind_maxparen, ind_maxcomment) == FAIL)
7575 				break;
7576 			    continue;
7577 			}
7578 
7579 			/*
7580 			 * If we're at the end of a block, skip to the start of
7581 			 * that block.
7582 			 */
7583 			curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
7584 			if (*cin_skipcomment(l) == '}'
7585 				&& (trypos = find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment))
7586 							    != NULL) /* XXX */
7587 			{
7588 			    curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum;
7589 			    /* if not "else {" check for terminated again */
7590 			    /* but skip block for "} else {" */
7591 			    l = cin_skipcomment(ml_get_curline());
7592 			    if (*l == '}' || !cin_iselse(l))
7593 				goto term_again;
7594 			    ++curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
7595 			}
7596 		    }
7597 		}
7598 	    }
7599 	}
7600       }
7601 
7602       /* add extra indent for a comment */
7603       if (cin_iscomment(theline))
7604 	  amount += ind_comment;
7605     }
7606 
7607     /*
7608      * ok -- we're not inside any sort of structure at all!
7609      *
7610      * this means we're at the top level, and everything should
7611      * basically just match where the previous line is, except
7612      * for the lines immediately following a function declaration,
7613      * which are K&R-style parameters and need to be indented.
7614      */
7615     else
7616     {
7617 	/*
7618 	 * if our line starts with an open brace, forget about any
7619 	 * prevailing indent and make sure it looks like the start
7620 	 * of a function
7621 	 */
7622 
7623 	if (theline[0] == '{')
7624 	{
7625 	    amount = ind_first_open;
7626 	}
7627 
7628 	/*
7629 	 * If the NEXT line is a function declaration, the current
7630 	 * line needs to be indented as a function type spec.
7631 	 * Don't do this if the current line looks like a comment
7632 	 * or if the current line is terminated, ie. ends in ';'.
7633 	 */
7634 	else if (cur_curpos.lnum < curbuf->b_ml.ml_line_count
7635 		&& !cin_nocode(theline)
7636 		&& !cin_ends_in(theline, (char_u *)":", NULL)
7637 		&& !cin_ends_in(theline, (char_u *)",", NULL)
7638 		&& cin_isfuncdecl(NULL, cur_curpos.lnum + 1)
7639 		&& !cin_isterminated(theline, FALSE, TRUE))
7640 	{
7641 	    amount = ind_func_type;
7642 	}
7643 	else
7644 	{
7645 	    amount = 0;
7646 	    curwin->w_cursor = cur_curpos;
7647 
7648 	    /* search backwards until we find something we recognize */
7649 
7650 	    while (curwin->w_cursor.lnum > 1)
7651 	    {
7652 		curwin->w_cursor.lnum--;
7653 		curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
7654 
7655 		l = ml_get_curline();
7656 
7657 		/*
7658 		 * If we're in a comment now, skip to the start of the comment.
7659 		 */						/* XXX */
7660 		if ((trypos = find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
7661 		{
7662 		    curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum + 1;
7663 		    continue;
7664 		}
7665 
7666 		/*
7667 		 * Are we at the start of a cpp base class declaration or
7668 		 * constructor initialization?
7669 		 */						    /* XXX */
7670 		n = FALSE;
7671 		if (ind_cpp_baseclass != 0 && theline[0] != '{')
7672 		{
7673 		    n = cin_is_cpp_baseclass(l, &col);
7674 		    l = ml_get_curline();
7675 		}
7676 		if (n)
7677 		{
7678 								     /* XXX */
7679 		    amount = get_baseclass_amount(col, ind_maxparen,
7680 					   ind_maxcomment, ind_cpp_baseclass);
7681 		    break;
7682 		}
7683 
7684 		/*
7685 		 * Skip preprocessor directives and blank lines.
7686 		 */
7687 		if (cin_ispreproc_cont(&l, &curwin->w_cursor.lnum))
7688 		    continue;
7689 
7690 		if (cin_nocode(l))
7691 		    continue;
7692 
7693 		/*
7694 		 * If the previous line ends in ',', use one level of
7695 		 * indentation:
7696 		 * int foo,
7697 		 *     bar;
7698 		 * do this before checking for '}' in case of eg.
7699 		 * enum foobar
7700 		 * {
7701 		 *   ...
7702 		 * } foo,
7703 		 *   bar;
7704 		 */
7705 		n = 0;
7706 		if (cin_ends_in(l, (char_u *)",", NULL)
7707 			     || (*l != NUL && (n = l[STRLEN(l) - 1]) == '\\'))
7708 		{
7709 		    /* take us back to opening paren */
7710 		    if (find_last_paren(l, '(', ')')
7711 			    && (trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen,
7712 						     ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
7713 			curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum;
7714 
7715 		    /* For a line ending in ',' that is a continuation line go
7716 		     * back to the first line with a backslash:
7717 		     * char *foo = "bla\
7718 		     *		 bla",
7719 		     *      here;
7720 		     */
7721 		    while (n == 0 && curwin->w_cursor.lnum > 1)
7722 		    {
7723 			l = ml_get(curwin->w_cursor.lnum - 1);
7724 			if (*l == NUL || l[STRLEN(l) - 1] != '\\')
7725 			    break;
7726 			--curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
7727 		    }
7728 
7729 		    amount = get_indent();	    /* XXX */
7730 
7731 		    if (amount == 0)
7732 			amount = cin_first_id_amount();
7733 		    if (amount == 0)
7734 			amount = ind_continuation;
7735 		    break;
7736 		}
7737 
7738 		/*
7739 		 * If the line looks like a function declaration, and we're
7740 		 * not in a comment, put it the left margin.
7741 		 */
7742 		if (cin_isfuncdecl(NULL, cur_curpos.lnum))  /* XXX */
7743 		    break;
7744 		l = ml_get_curline();
7745 
7746 		/*
7747 		 * Finding the closing '}' of a previous function.  Put
7748 		 * current line at the left margin.  For when 'cino' has "fs".
7749 		 */
7750 		if (*skipwhite(l) == '}')
7751 		    break;
7752 
7753 		/*			    (matching {)
7754 		 * If the previous line ends on '};' (maybe followed by
7755 		 * comments) align at column 0.  For example:
7756 		 * char *string_array[] = { "foo",
7757 		 *     / * x * / "b};ar" }; / * foobar * /
7758 		 */
7759 		if (cin_ends_in(l, (char_u *)"};", NULL))
7760 		    break;
7761 
7762 		/*
7763 		 * If the PREVIOUS line is a function declaration, the current
7764 		 * line (and the ones that follow) needs to be indented as
7765 		 * parameters.
7766 		 */
7767 		if (cin_isfuncdecl(&l, curwin->w_cursor.lnum))
7768 		{
7769 		    amount = ind_param;
7770 		    break;
7771 		}
7772 
7773 		/*
7774 		 * If the previous line ends in ';' and the line before the
7775 		 * previous line ends in ',' or '\', ident to column zero:
7776 		 * int foo,
7777 		 *     bar;
7778 		 * indent_to_0 here;
7779 		 */
7780 		if (cin_ends_in(l, (char_u *)";", NULL))
7781 		{
7782 		    l = ml_get(curwin->w_cursor.lnum - 1);
7783 		    if (cin_ends_in(l, (char_u *)",", NULL)
7784 			    || (*l != NUL && l[STRLEN(l) - 1] == '\\'))
7785 			break;
7786 		    l = ml_get_curline();
7787 		}
7788 
7789 		/*
7790 		 * Doesn't look like anything interesting -- so just
7791 		 * use the indent of this line.
7792 		 *
7793 		 * Position the cursor over the rightmost paren, so that
7794 		 * matching it will take us back to the start of the line.
7795 		 */
7796 		find_last_paren(l, '(', ')');
7797 
7798 		if ((trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen,
7799 						     ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
7800 		    curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum;
7801 		amount = get_indent();	    /* XXX */
7802 		break;
7803 	    }
7804 
7805 	    /* add extra indent for a comment */
7806 	    if (cin_iscomment(theline))
7807 		amount += ind_comment;
7808 
7809 	    /* add extra indent if the previous line ended in a backslash:
7810 	     *	      "asdfasdf\
7811 	     *		  here";
7812 	     *	    char *foo = "asdf\
7813 	     *			 here";
7814 	     */
7815 	    if (cur_curpos.lnum > 1)
7816 	    {
7817 		l = ml_get(cur_curpos.lnum - 1);
7818 		if (*l != NUL && l[STRLEN(l) - 1] == '\\')
7819 		{
7820 		    cur_amount = cin_get_equal_amount(cur_curpos.lnum - 1);
7821 		    if (cur_amount > 0)
7822 			amount = cur_amount;
7823 		    else if (cur_amount == 0)
7824 			amount += ind_continuation;
7825 		}
7826 	    }
7827 	}
7828     }
7829 
7830 theend:
7831     /* put the cursor back where it belongs */
7832     curwin->w_cursor = cur_curpos;
7833 
7834     vim_free(linecopy);
7835 
7836     if (amount < 0)
7837 	return 0;
7838     return amount;
7839 }
7840 
7841     static int
7842 find_match(lookfor, ourscope, ind_maxparen, ind_maxcomment)
7843     int		lookfor;
7844     linenr_T	ourscope;
7845     int		ind_maxparen;
7846     int		ind_maxcomment;
7847 {
7848     char_u	*look;
7849     pos_T	*theirscope;
7850     char_u	*mightbeif;
7851     int		elselevel;
7852     int		whilelevel;
7853 
7854     if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_IF)
7855     {
7856 	elselevel = 1;
7857 	whilelevel = 0;
7858     }
7859     else
7860     {
7861 	elselevel = 0;
7862 	whilelevel = 1;
7863     }
7864 
7865     curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
7866 
7867     while (curwin->w_cursor.lnum > ourscope + 1)
7868     {
7869 	curwin->w_cursor.lnum--;
7870 	curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
7871 
7872 	look = cin_skipcomment(ml_get_curline());
7873 	if (cin_iselse(look)
7874 		|| cin_isif(look)
7875 		|| cin_isdo(look)			    /* XXX */
7876 		|| cin_iswhileofdo(look, curwin->w_cursor.lnum, ind_maxparen))
7877 	{
7878 	    /*
7879 	     * if we've gone outside the braces entirely,
7880 	     * we must be out of scope...
7881 	     */
7882 	    theirscope = find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment);  /* XXX */
7883 	    if (theirscope == NULL)
7884 		break;
7885 
7886 	    /*
7887 	     * and if the brace enclosing this is further
7888 	     * back than the one enclosing the else, we're
7889 	     * out of luck too.
7890 	     */
7891 	    if (theirscope->lnum < ourscope)
7892 		break;
7893 
7894 	    /*
7895 	     * and if they're enclosed in a *deeper* brace,
7896 	     * then we can ignore it because it's in a
7897 	     * different scope...
7898 	     */
7899 	    if (theirscope->lnum > ourscope)
7900 		continue;
7901 
7902 	    /*
7903 	     * if it was an "else" (that's not an "else if")
7904 	     * then we need to go back to another if, so
7905 	     * increment elselevel
7906 	     */
7907 	    look = cin_skipcomment(ml_get_curline());
7908 	    if (cin_iselse(look))
7909 	    {
7910 		mightbeif = cin_skipcomment(look + 4);
7911 		if (!cin_isif(mightbeif))
7912 		    ++elselevel;
7913 		continue;
7914 	    }
7915 
7916 	    /*
7917 	     * if it was a "while" then we need to go back to
7918 	     * another "do", so increment whilelevel.  XXX
7919 	     */
7920 	    if (cin_iswhileofdo(look, curwin->w_cursor.lnum, ind_maxparen))
7921 	    {
7922 		++whilelevel;
7923 		continue;
7924 	    }
7925 
7926 	    /* If it's an "if" decrement elselevel */
7927 	    look = cin_skipcomment(ml_get_curline());
7928 	    if (cin_isif(look))
7929 	    {
7930 		elselevel--;
7931 		/*
7932 		 * When looking for an "if" ignore "while"s that
7933 		 * get in the way.
7934 		 */
7935 		if (elselevel == 0 && lookfor == LOOKFOR_IF)
7936 		    whilelevel = 0;
7937 	    }
7938 
7939 	    /* If it's a "do" decrement whilelevel */
7940 	    if (cin_isdo(look))
7941 		whilelevel--;
7942 
7943 	    /*
7944 	     * if we've used up all the elses, then
7945 	     * this must be the if that we want!
7946 	     * match the indent level of that if.
7947 	     */
7948 	    if (elselevel <= 0 && whilelevel <= 0)
7949 	    {
7950 		return OK;
7951 	    }
7952 	}
7953     }
7954     return FAIL;
7955 }
7956 
7957 # if defined(FEAT_EVAL) || defined(PROTO)
7958 /*
7959  * Get indent level from 'indentexpr'.
7960  */
7961     int
7962 get_expr_indent()
7963 {
7964     int		indent;
7965     pos_T	pos;
7966     int		save_State;
7967     int		use_sandbox = was_set_insecurely((char_u *)"indentexpr",
7968 								   OPT_LOCAL);
7969 
7970     pos = curwin->w_cursor;
7971     set_vim_var_nr(VV_LNUM, curwin->w_cursor.lnum);
7972     if (use_sandbox)
7973 	++sandbox;
7974     ++textlock;
7975     indent = eval_to_number(curbuf->b_p_inde);
7976     if (use_sandbox)
7977 	--sandbox;
7978     --textlock;
7979 
7980     /* Restore the cursor position so that 'indentexpr' doesn't need to.
7981      * Pretend to be in Insert mode, allow cursor past end of line for "o"
7982      * command. */
7983     save_State = State;
7984     State = INSERT;
7985     curwin->w_cursor = pos;
7986     check_cursor();
7987     State = save_State;
7988 
7989     /* If there is an error, just keep the current indent. */
7990     if (indent < 0)
7991 	indent = get_indent();
7992 
7993     return indent;
7994 }
7995 # endif
7996 
7997 #endif /* FEAT_CINDENT */
7998 
7999 #if defined(FEAT_LISP) || defined(PROTO)
8000 
8001 static int lisp_match __ARGS((char_u *p));
8002 
8003     static int
8004 lisp_match(p)
8005     char_u	*p;
8006 {
8007     char_u	buf[LSIZE];
8008     int		len;
8009     char_u	*word = p_lispwords;
8010 
8011     while (*word != NUL)
8012     {
8013 	(void)copy_option_part(&word, buf, LSIZE, ",");
8014 	len = (int)STRLEN(buf);
8015 	if (STRNCMP(buf, p, len) == 0 && p[len] == ' ')
8016 	    return TRUE;
8017     }
8018     return FALSE;
8019 }
8020 
8021 /*
8022  * When 'p' is present in 'cpoptions, a Vi compatible method is used.
8023  * The incompatible newer method is quite a bit better at indenting
8024  * code in lisp-like languages than the traditional one; it's still
8025  * mostly heuristics however -- Dirk van Deun, [email protected]
8026  *
8027  * TODO:
8028  * Findmatch() should be adapted for lisp, also to make showmatch
8029  * work correctly: now (v5.3) it seems all C/C++ oriented:
8030  * - it does not recognize the #\( and #\) notations as character literals
8031  * - it doesn't know about comments starting with a semicolon
8032  * - it incorrectly interprets '(' as a character literal
8033  * All this messes up get_lisp_indent in some rare cases.
8034  * Update from Sergey Khorev:
8035  * I tried to fix the first two issues.
8036  */
8037     int
8038 get_lisp_indent()
8039 {
8040     pos_T	*pos, realpos, paren;
8041     int		amount;
8042     char_u	*that;
8043     colnr_T	col;
8044     colnr_T	firsttry;
8045     int		parencount, quotecount;
8046     int		vi_lisp;
8047 
8048     /* Set vi_lisp to use the vi-compatible method */
8049     vi_lisp = (vim_strchr(p_cpo, CPO_LISP) != NULL);
8050 
8051     realpos = curwin->w_cursor;
8052     curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
8053 
8054     if ((pos = findmatch(NULL, '(')) == NULL)
8055 	pos = findmatch(NULL, '[');
8056     else
8057     {
8058 	paren = *pos;
8059 	pos = findmatch(NULL, '[');
8060 	if (pos == NULL || ltp(pos, &paren))
8061 	    pos = &paren;
8062     }
8063     if (pos != NULL)
8064     {
8065 	/* Extra trick: Take the indent of the first previous non-white
8066 	 * line that is at the same () level. */
8067 	amount = -1;
8068 	parencount = 0;
8069 
8070 	while (--curwin->w_cursor.lnum >= pos->lnum)
8071 	{
8072 	    if (linewhite(curwin->w_cursor.lnum))
8073 		continue;
8074 	    for (that = ml_get_curline(); *that != NUL; ++that)
8075 	    {
8076 		if (*that == ';')
8077 		{
8078 		    while (*(that + 1) != NUL)
8079 			++that;
8080 		    continue;
8081 		}
8082 		if (*that == '\\')
8083 		{
8084 		    if (*(that + 1) != NUL)
8085 			++that;
8086 		    continue;
8087 		}
8088 		if (*that == '"' && *(that + 1) != NUL)
8089 		{
8090 		    while (*++that && *that != '"')
8091 		    {
8092 			/* skipping escaped characters in the string */
8093 			if (*that == '\\')
8094 			{
8095 			    if (*++that == NUL)
8096 				break;
8097 			    if (that[1] == NUL)
8098 			    {
8099 				++that;
8100 				break;
8101 			    }
8102 			}
8103 		    }
8104 		}
8105 		if (*that == '(' || *that == '[')
8106 		    ++parencount;
8107 		else if (*that == ')' || *that == ']')
8108 		    --parencount;
8109 	    }
8110 	    if (parencount == 0)
8111 	    {
8112 		amount = get_indent();
8113 		break;
8114 	    }
8115 	}
8116 
8117 	if (amount == -1)
8118 	{
8119 	    curwin->w_cursor.lnum = pos->lnum;
8120 	    curwin->w_cursor.col = pos->col;
8121 	    col = pos->col;
8122 
8123 	    that = ml_get_curline();
8124 
8125 	    if (vi_lisp && get_indent() == 0)
8126 		amount = 2;
8127 	    else
8128 	    {
8129 		amount = 0;
8130 		while (*that && col)
8131 		{
8132 		    amount += lbr_chartabsize_adv(&that, (colnr_T)amount);
8133 		    col--;
8134 		}
8135 
8136 		/*
8137 		 * Some keywords require "body" indenting rules (the
8138 		 * non-standard-lisp ones are Scheme special forms):
8139 		 *
8140 		 * (let ((a 1))    instead    (let ((a 1))
8141 		 *   (...))	      of	   (...))
8142 		 */
8143 
8144 		if (!vi_lisp && (*that == '(' || *that == '[')
8145 						      && lisp_match(that + 1))
8146 		    amount += 2;
8147 		else
8148 		{
8149 		    that++;
8150 		    amount++;
8151 		    firsttry = amount;
8152 
8153 		    while (vim_iswhite(*that))
8154 		    {
8155 			amount += lbr_chartabsize(that, (colnr_T)amount);
8156 			++that;
8157 		    }
8158 
8159 		    if (*that && *that != ';') /* not a comment line */
8160 		    {
8161 			/* test *that != '(' to accomodate first let/do
8162 			 * argument if it is more than one line */
8163 			if (!vi_lisp && *that != '(' && *that != '[')
8164 			    firsttry++;
8165 
8166 			parencount = 0;
8167 			quotecount = 0;
8168 
8169 			if (vi_lisp
8170 				|| (*that != '"'
8171 				    && *that != '\''
8172 				    && *that != '#'
8173 				    && (*that < '0' || *that > '9')))
8174 			{
8175 			    while (*that
8176 				    && (!vim_iswhite(*that)
8177 					|| quotecount
8178 					|| parencount)
8179 				    && (!((*that == '(' || *that == '[')
8180 					    && !quotecount
8181 					    && !parencount
8182 					    && vi_lisp)))
8183 			    {
8184 				if (*that == '"')
8185 				    quotecount = !quotecount;
8186 				if ((*that == '(' || *that == '[')
8187 							       && !quotecount)
8188 				    ++parencount;
8189 				if ((*that == ')' || *that == ']')
8190 							       && !quotecount)
8191 				    --parencount;
8192 				if (*that == '\\' && *(that+1) != NUL)
8193 				    amount += lbr_chartabsize_adv(&that,
8194 							     (colnr_T)amount);
8195 				amount += lbr_chartabsize_adv(&that,
8196 							     (colnr_T)amount);
8197 			    }
8198 			}
8199 			while (vim_iswhite(*that))
8200 			{
8201 			    amount += lbr_chartabsize(that, (colnr_T)amount);
8202 			    that++;
8203 			}
8204 			if (!*that || *that == ';')
8205 			    amount = firsttry;
8206 		    }
8207 		}
8208 	    }
8209 	}
8210     }
8211     else
8212 	amount = 0;	/* no matching '(' or '[' found, use zero indent */
8213 
8214     curwin->w_cursor = realpos;
8215 
8216     return amount;
8217 }
8218 #endif /* FEAT_LISP */
8219 
8220     void
8221 prepare_to_exit()
8222 {
8223 #if defined(SIGHUP) && defined(SIG_IGN)
8224     /* Ignore SIGHUP, because a dropped connection causes a read error, which
8225      * makes Vim exit and then handling SIGHUP causes various reentrance
8226      * problems. */
8227     signal(SIGHUP, SIG_IGN);
8228 #endif
8229 
8230 #ifdef FEAT_GUI
8231     if (gui.in_use)
8232     {
8233 	gui.dying = TRUE;
8234 	out_trash();	/* trash any pending output */
8235     }
8236     else
8237 #endif
8238     {
8239 	windgoto((int)Rows - 1, 0);
8240 
8241 	/*
8242 	 * Switch terminal mode back now, so messages end up on the "normal"
8243 	 * screen (if there are two screens).
8244 	 */
8245 	settmode(TMODE_COOK);
8246 #ifdef WIN3264
8247 	if (can_end_termcap_mode(FALSE) == TRUE)
8248 #endif
8249 	    stoptermcap();
8250 	out_flush();
8251     }
8252 }
8253 
8254 /*
8255  * Preserve files and exit.
8256  * When called IObuff must contain a message.
8257  */
8258     void
8259 preserve_exit()
8260 {
8261     buf_T	*buf;
8262 
8263     prepare_to_exit();
8264 
8265     /* Setting this will prevent free() calls.  That avoids calling free()
8266      * recursively when free() was invoked with a bad pointer. */
8267     really_exiting = TRUE;
8268 
8269     out_str(IObuff);
8270     screen_start();		    /* don't know where cursor is now */
8271     out_flush();
8272 
8273     ml_close_notmod();		    /* close all not-modified buffers */
8274 
8275     for (buf = firstbuf; buf != NULL; buf = buf->b_next)
8276     {
8277 	if (buf->b_ml.ml_mfp != NULL && buf->b_ml.ml_mfp->mf_fname != NULL)
8278 	{
8279 	    OUT_STR(_("Vim: preserving files...\n"));
8280 	    screen_start();	    /* don't know where cursor is now */
8281 	    out_flush();
8282 	    ml_sync_all(FALSE, FALSE);	/* preserve all swap files */
8283 	    break;
8284 	}
8285     }
8286 
8287     ml_close_all(FALSE);	    /* close all memfiles, without deleting */
8288 
8289     OUT_STR(_("Vim: Finished.\n"));
8290 
8291     getout(1);
8292 }
8293 
8294 /*
8295  * return TRUE if "fname" exists.
8296  */
8297     int
8298 vim_fexists(fname)
8299     char_u  *fname;
8300 {
8301     struct stat st;
8302 
8303     if (mch_stat((char *)fname, &st))
8304 	return FALSE;
8305     return TRUE;
8306 }
8307 
8308 /*
8309  * Check for CTRL-C pressed, but only once in a while.
8310  * Should be used instead of ui_breakcheck() for functions that check for
8311  * each line in the file.  Calling ui_breakcheck() each time takes too much
8312  * time, because it can be a system call.
8313  */
8314 
8315 #ifndef BREAKCHECK_SKIP
8316 # ifdef FEAT_GUI		    /* assume the GUI only runs on fast computers */
8317 #  define BREAKCHECK_SKIP 200
8318 # else
8319 #  define BREAKCHECK_SKIP 32
8320 # endif
8321 #endif
8322 
8323 static int	breakcheck_count = 0;
8324 
8325     void
8326 line_breakcheck()
8327 {
8328     if (++breakcheck_count >= BREAKCHECK_SKIP)
8329     {
8330 	breakcheck_count = 0;
8331 	ui_breakcheck();
8332     }
8333 }
8334 
8335 /*
8336  * Like line_breakcheck() but check 10 times less often.
8337  */
8338     void
8339 fast_breakcheck()
8340 {
8341     if (++breakcheck_count >= BREAKCHECK_SKIP * 10)
8342     {
8343 	breakcheck_count = 0;
8344 	ui_breakcheck();
8345     }
8346 }
8347 
8348 /*
8349  * Expand wildcards.  Calls gen_expand_wildcards() and removes files matching
8350  * 'wildignore'.
8351  * Returns OK or FAIL.
8352  */
8353     int
8354 expand_wildcards(num_pat, pat, num_file, file, flags)
8355     int		   num_pat;	/* number of input patterns */
8356     char_u	 **pat;		/* array of input patterns */
8357     int		  *num_file;	/* resulting number of files */
8358     char_u	***file;	/* array of resulting files */
8359     int		   flags;	/* EW_DIR, etc. */
8360 {
8361     int		retval;
8362     int		i, j;
8363     char_u	*p;
8364     int		non_suf_match;	/* number without matching suffix */
8365 
8366     retval = gen_expand_wildcards(num_pat, pat, num_file, file, flags);
8367 
8368     /* When keeping all matches, return here */
8369     if (flags & EW_KEEPALL)
8370 	return retval;
8371 
8372 #ifdef FEAT_WILDIGN
8373     /*
8374      * Remove names that match 'wildignore'.
8375      */
8376     if (*p_wig)
8377     {
8378 	char_u	*ffname;
8379 
8380 	/* check all files in (*file)[] */
8381 	for (i = 0; i < *num_file; ++i)
8382 	{
8383 	    ffname = FullName_save((*file)[i], FALSE);
8384 	    if (ffname == NULL)		/* out of memory */
8385 		break;
8386 # ifdef VMS
8387 	    vms_remove_version(ffname);
8388 # endif
8389 	    if (match_file_list(p_wig, (*file)[i], ffname))
8390 	    {
8391 		/* remove this matching file from the list */
8392 		vim_free((*file)[i]);
8393 		for (j = i; j + 1 < *num_file; ++j)
8394 		    (*file)[j] = (*file)[j + 1];
8395 		--*num_file;
8396 		--i;
8397 	    }
8398 	    vim_free(ffname);
8399 	}
8400     }
8401 #endif
8402 
8403     /*
8404      * Move the names where 'suffixes' match to the end.
8405      */
8406     if (*num_file > 1)
8407     {
8408 	non_suf_match = 0;
8409 	for (i = 0; i < *num_file; ++i)
8410 	{
8411 	    if (!match_suffix((*file)[i]))
8412 	    {
8413 		/*
8414 		 * Move the name without matching suffix to the front
8415 		 * of the list.
8416 		 */
8417 		p = (*file)[i];
8418 		for (j = i; j > non_suf_match; --j)
8419 		    (*file)[j] = (*file)[j - 1];
8420 		(*file)[non_suf_match++] = p;
8421 	    }
8422 	}
8423     }
8424 
8425     return retval;
8426 }
8427 
8428 /*
8429  * Return TRUE if "fname" matches with an entry in 'suffixes'.
8430  */
8431     int
8432 match_suffix(fname)
8433     char_u	*fname;
8434 {
8435     int		fnamelen, setsuflen;
8436     char_u	*setsuf;
8437 #define MAXSUFLEN 30	    /* maximum length of a file suffix */
8438     char_u	suf_buf[MAXSUFLEN];
8439 
8440     fnamelen = (int)STRLEN(fname);
8441     setsuflen = 0;
8442     for (setsuf = p_su; *setsuf; )
8443     {
8444 	setsuflen = copy_option_part(&setsuf, suf_buf, MAXSUFLEN, ".,");
8445 	if (fnamelen >= setsuflen
8446 		&& fnamencmp(suf_buf, fname + fnamelen - setsuflen,
8447 					      (size_t)setsuflen) == 0)
8448 	    break;
8449 	setsuflen = 0;
8450     }
8451     return (setsuflen != 0);
8452 }
8453 
8454 #if !defined(NO_EXPANDPATH) || defined(PROTO)
8455 
8456 # ifdef VIM_BACKTICK
8457 static int vim_backtick __ARGS((char_u *p));
8458 static int expand_backtick __ARGS((garray_T *gap, char_u *pat, int flags));
8459 # endif
8460 
8461 # if defined(MSDOS) || defined(FEAT_GUI_W16) || defined(WIN3264)
8462 /*
8463  * File name expansion code for MS-DOS, Win16 and Win32.  It's here because
8464  * it's shared between these systems.
8465  */
8466 # if defined(DJGPP) || defined(PROTO)
8467 #  define _cdecl	    /* DJGPP doesn't have this */
8468 # else
8469 #  ifdef __BORLANDC__
8470 #   define _cdecl _RTLENTRYF
8471 #  endif
8472 # endif
8473 
8474 /*
8475  * comparison function for qsort in dos_expandpath()
8476  */
8477     static int _cdecl
8478 pstrcmp(const void *a, const void *b)
8479 {
8480     return (pathcmp(*(char **)a, *(char **)b, -1));
8481 }
8482 
8483 # ifndef WIN3264
8484     static void
8485 namelowcpy(
8486     char_u *d,
8487     char_u *s)
8488 {
8489 #  ifdef DJGPP
8490     if (USE_LONG_FNAME)	    /* don't lower case on Windows 95/NT systems */
8491 	while (*s)
8492 	    *d++ = *s++;
8493     else
8494 #  endif
8495 	while (*s)
8496 	    *d++ = TOLOWER_LOC(*s++);
8497     *d = NUL;
8498 }
8499 # endif
8500 
8501 /*
8502  * Recursively expand one path component into all matching files and/or
8503  * directories.  Adds matches to "gap".  Handles "*", "?", "[a-z]", "**", etc.
8504  * Return the number of matches found.
8505  * "path" has backslashes before chars that are not to be expanded, starting
8506  * at "path[wildoff]".
8507  * Return the number of matches found.
8508  * NOTE: much of this is identical to unix_expandpath(), keep in sync!
8509  */
8510     static int
8511 dos_expandpath(
8512     garray_T	*gap,
8513     char_u	*path,
8514     int		wildoff,
8515     int		flags,		/* EW_* flags */
8516     int		didstar)	/* expaneded "**" once already */
8517 {
8518     char_u	*buf;
8519     char_u	*path_end;
8520     char_u	*p, *s, *e;
8521     int		start_len = gap->ga_len;
8522     char_u	*pat;
8523     regmatch_T	regmatch;
8524     int		starts_with_dot;
8525     int		matches;
8526     int		len;
8527     int		starstar = FALSE;
8528     static int	stardepth = 0;	    /* depth for "**" expansion */
8529 #ifdef WIN3264
8530     WIN32_FIND_DATA	fb;
8531     HANDLE		hFind = (HANDLE)0;
8532 # ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
8533     WIN32_FIND_DATAW    wfb;
8534     WCHAR		*wn = NULL;	/* UCS-2 name, NULL when not used. */
8535 # endif
8536 #else
8537     struct ffblk	fb;
8538 #endif
8539     char_u		*matchname;
8540     int			ok;
8541 
8542     /* Expanding "**" may take a long time, check for CTRL-C. */
8543     if (stardepth > 0)
8544     {
8545 	ui_breakcheck();
8546 	if (got_int)
8547 	    return 0;
8548     }
8549 
8550     /* make room for file name */
8551     buf = alloc((int)STRLEN(path) + BASENAMELEN + 5);
8552     if (buf == NULL)
8553 	return 0;
8554 
8555     /*
8556      * Find the first part in the path name that contains a wildcard or a ~1.
8557      * Copy it into buf, including the preceding characters.
8558      */
8559     p = buf;
8560     s = buf;
8561     e = NULL;
8562     path_end = path;
8563     while (*path_end != NUL)
8564     {
8565 	/* May ignore a wildcard that has a backslash before it; it will
8566 	 * be removed by rem_backslash() or file_pat_to_reg_pat() below. */
8567 	if (path_end >= path + wildoff && rem_backslash(path_end))
8568 	    *p++ = *path_end++;
8569 	else if (*path_end == '\\' || *path_end == ':' || *path_end == '/')
8570 	{
8571 	    if (e != NULL)
8572 		break;
8573 	    s = p + 1;
8574 	}
8575 	else if (path_end >= path + wildoff
8576 			 && vim_strchr((char_u *)"*?[~", *path_end) != NULL)
8577 	    e = p;
8578 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
8579 	if (has_mbyte)
8580 	{
8581 	    len = (*mb_ptr2len)(path_end);
8582 	    STRNCPY(p, path_end, len);
8583 	    p += len;
8584 	    path_end += len;
8585 	}
8586 	else
8587 #endif
8588 	    *p++ = *path_end++;
8589     }
8590     e = p;
8591     *e = NUL;
8592 
8593     /* now we have one wildcard component between s and e */
8594     /* Remove backslashes between "wildoff" and the start of the wildcard
8595      * component. */
8596     for (p = buf + wildoff; p < s; ++p)
8597 	if (rem_backslash(p))
8598 	{
8599 	    STRCPY(p, p + 1);
8600 	    --e;
8601 	    --s;
8602 	}
8603 
8604     /* Check for "**" between "s" and "e". */
8605     for (p = s; p < e; ++p)
8606 	if (p[0] == '*' && p[1] == '*')
8607 	    starstar = TRUE;
8608 
8609     starts_with_dot = (*s == '.');
8610     pat = file_pat_to_reg_pat(s, e, NULL, FALSE);
8611     if (pat == NULL)
8612     {
8613 	vim_free(buf);
8614 	return 0;
8615     }
8616 
8617     /* compile the regexp into a program */
8618     regmatch.rm_ic = TRUE;		/* Always ignore case */
8619     regmatch.regprog = vim_regcomp(pat, RE_MAGIC);
8620     vim_free(pat);
8621 
8622     if (regmatch.regprog == NULL)
8623     {
8624 	vim_free(buf);
8625 	return 0;
8626     }
8627 
8628     /* remember the pattern or file name being looked for */
8629     matchname = vim_strsave(s);
8630 
8631     /* If "**" is by itself, this is the first time we encounter it and more
8632      * is following then find matches without any directory. */
8633     if (!didstar && stardepth < 100 && starstar && e - s == 2
8634 							  && *path_end == '/')
8635     {
8636 	STRCPY(s, path_end + 1);
8637 	++stardepth;
8638 	(void)dos_expandpath(gap, buf, (int)(s - buf), flags, TRUE);
8639 	--stardepth;
8640     }
8641 
8642     /* Scan all files in the directory with "dir/ *.*" */
8643     STRCPY(s, "*.*");
8644 #ifdef WIN3264
8645 # ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
8646     if (enc_codepage >= 0 && (int)GetACP() != enc_codepage)
8647     {
8648 	/* The active codepage differs from 'encoding'.  Attempt using the
8649 	 * wide function.  If it fails because it is not implemented fall back
8650 	 * to the non-wide version (for Windows 98) */
8651 	wn = enc_to_ucs2(buf, NULL);
8652 	if (wn != NULL)
8653 	{
8654 	    hFind = FindFirstFileW(wn, &wfb);
8655 	    if (hFind == INVALID_HANDLE_VALUE
8656 			      && GetLastError() == ERROR_CALL_NOT_IMPLEMENTED)
8657 	    {
8658 		vim_free(wn);
8659 		wn = NULL;
8660 	    }
8661 	}
8662     }
8663 
8664     if (wn == NULL)
8665 # endif
8666 	hFind = FindFirstFile(buf, &fb);
8667     ok = (hFind != INVALID_HANDLE_VALUE);
8668 #else
8669     /* If we are expanding wildcards we try both files and directories */
8670     ok = (findfirst((char *)buf, &fb,
8671 		(*path_end != NUL || (flags & EW_DIR)) ? FA_DIREC : 0) == 0);
8672 #endif
8673 
8674     while (ok)
8675     {
8676 #ifdef WIN3264
8677 # ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
8678 	if (wn != NULL)
8679 	    p = ucs2_to_enc(wfb.cFileName, NULL);   /* p is allocated here */
8680 	else
8681 # endif
8682 	    p = (char_u *)fb.cFileName;
8683 #else
8684 	p = (char_u *)fb.ff_name;
8685 #endif
8686 	/* Ignore entries starting with a dot, unless when asked for.  Accept
8687 	 * all entries found with "matchname". */
8688 	if ((p[0] != '.' || starts_with_dot)
8689 		&& (matchname == NULL
8690 		    || vim_regexec(&regmatch, p, (colnr_T)0)))
8691 	{
8692 #ifdef WIN3264
8693 	    STRCPY(s, p);
8694 #else
8695 	    namelowcpy(s, p);
8696 #endif
8697 	    len = (int)STRLEN(buf);
8698 
8699 	    if (starstar && stardepth < 100)
8700 	    {
8701 		/* For "**" in the pattern first go deeper in the tree to
8702 		 * find matches. */
8703 		STRCPY(buf + len, "/**");
8704 		STRCPY(buf + len + 3, path_end);
8705 		++stardepth;
8706 		(void)dos_expandpath(gap, buf, len + 1, flags, TRUE);
8707 		--stardepth;
8708 	    }
8709 
8710 	    STRCPY(buf + len, path_end);
8711 	    if (mch_has_exp_wildcard(path_end))
8712 	    {
8713 		/* need to expand another component of the path */
8714 		/* remove backslashes for the remaining components only */
8715 		(void)dos_expandpath(gap, buf, len + 1, flags, FALSE);
8716 	    }
8717 	    else
8718 	    {
8719 		/* no more wildcards, check if there is a match */
8720 		/* remove backslashes for the remaining components only */
8721 		if (*path_end != 0)
8722 		    backslash_halve(buf + len + 1);
8723 		if (mch_getperm(buf) >= 0)	/* add existing file */
8724 		    addfile(gap, buf, flags);
8725 	    }
8726 	}
8727 
8728 #ifdef WIN3264
8729 # ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
8730 	if (wn != NULL)
8731 	{
8732 	    vim_free(p);
8733 	    ok = FindNextFileW(hFind, &wfb);
8734 	}
8735 	else
8736 # endif
8737 	    ok = FindNextFile(hFind, &fb);
8738 #else
8739 	ok = (findnext(&fb) == 0);
8740 #endif
8741 
8742 	/* If no more matches and no match was used, try expanding the name
8743 	 * itself.  Finds the long name of a short filename. */
8744 	if (!ok && matchname != NULL && gap->ga_len == start_len)
8745 	{
8746 	    STRCPY(s, matchname);
8747 #ifdef WIN3264
8748 	    FindClose(hFind);
8749 # ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
8750 	    if (wn != NULL)
8751 	    {
8752 		vim_free(wn);
8753 		wn = enc_to_ucs2(buf, NULL);
8754 		if (wn != NULL)
8755 		    hFind = FindFirstFileW(wn, &wfb);
8756 	    }
8757 	    if (wn == NULL)
8758 # endif
8759 		hFind = FindFirstFile(buf, &fb);
8760 	    ok = (hFind != INVALID_HANDLE_VALUE);
8761 #else
8762 	    ok = (findfirst((char *)buf, &fb,
8763 		 (*path_end != NUL || (flags & EW_DIR)) ? FA_DIREC : 0) == 0);
8764 #endif
8765 	    vim_free(matchname);
8766 	    matchname = NULL;
8767 	}
8768     }
8769 
8770 #ifdef WIN3264
8771     FindClose(hFind);
8772 # ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
8773     vim_free(wn);
8774 # endif
8775 #endif
8776     vim_free(buf);
8777     vim_free(regmatch.regprog);
8778     vim_free(matchname);
8779 
8780     matches = gap->ga_len - start_len;
8781     if (matches > 0)
8782 	qsort(((char_u **)gap->ga_data) + start_len, (size_t)matches,
8783 						   sizeof(char_u *), pstrcmp);
8784     return matches;
8785 }
8786 
8787     int
8788 mch_expandpath(
8789     garray_T	*gap,
8790     char_u	*path,
8791     int		flags)		/* EW_* flags */
8792 {
8793     return dos_expandpath(gap, path, 0, flags, FALSE);
8794 }
8795 # endif /* MSDOS || FEAT_GUI_W16 || WIN3264 */
8796 
8797 #if (defined(UNIX) && !defined(VMS)) || defined(USE_UNIXFILENAME) \
8798 	|| defined(PROTO)
8799 /*
8800  * Unix style wildcard expansion code.
8801  * It's here because it's used both for Unix and Mac.
8802  */
8803 static int	pstrcmp __ARGS((const void *, const void *));
8804 
8805     static int
8806 pstrcmp(a, b)
8807     const void *a, *b;
8808 {
8809     return (pathcmp(*(char **)a, *(char **)b, -1));
8810 }
8811 
8812 /*
8813  * Recursively expand one path component into all matching files and/or
8814  * directories.  Adds matches to "gap".  Handles "*", "?", "[a-z]", "**", etc.
8815  * "path" has backslashes before chars that are not to be expanded, starting
8816  * at "path + wildoff".
8817  * Return the number of matches found.
8818  * NOTE: much of this is identical to dos_expandpath(), keep in sync!
8819  */
8820     int
8821 unix_expandpath(gap, path, wildoff, flags, didstar)
8822     garray_T	*gap;
8823     char_u	*path;
8824     int		wildoff;
8825     int		flags;		/* EW_* flags */
8826     int		didstar;	/* expanded "**" once already */
8827 {
8828     char_u	*buf;
8829     char_u	*path_end;
8830     char_u	*p, *s, *e;
8831     int		start_len = gap->ga_len;
8832     char_u	*pat;
8833     regmatch_T	regmatch;
8834     int		starts_with_dot;
8835     int		matches;
8836     int		len;
8837     int		starstar = FALSE;
8838     static int	stardepth = 0;	    /* depth for "**" expansion */
8839 
8840     DIR		*dirp;
8841     struct dirent *dp;
8842 
8843     /* Expanding "**" may take a long time, check for CTRL-C. */
8844     if (stardepth > 0)
8845     {
8846 	ui_breakcheck();
8847 	if (got_int)
8848 	    return 0;
8849     }
8850 
8851     /* make room for file name */
8852     buf = alloc((int)STRLEN(path) + BASENAMELEN + 5);
8853     if (buf == NULL)
8854 	return 0;
8855 
8856     /*
8857      * Find the first part in the path name that contains a wildcard.
8858      * Copy it into "buf", including the preceding characters.
8859      */
8860     p = buf;
8861     s = buf;
8862     e = NULL;
8863     path_end = path;
8864     while (*path_end != NUL)
8865     {
8866 	/* May ignore a wildcard that has a backslash before it; it will
8867 	 * be removed by rem_backslash() or file_pat_to_reg_pat() below. */
8868 	if (path_end >= path + wildoff && rem_backslash(path_end))
8869 	    *p++ = *path_end++;
8870 	else if (*path_end == '/')
8871 	{
8872 	    if (e != NULL)
8873 		break;
8874 	    s = p + 1;
8875 	}
8876 	else if (path_end >= path + wildoff
8877 			 && vim_strchr((char_u *)"*?[{~$", *path_end) != NULL)
8878 	    e = p;
8879 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
8880 	if (has_mbyte)
8881 	{
8882 	    len = (*mb_ptr2len)(path_end);
8883 	    STRNCPY(p, path_end, len);
8884 	    p += len;
8885 	    path_end += len;
8886 	}
8887 	else
8888 #endif
8889 	    *p++ = *path_end++;
8890     }
8891     e = p;
8892     *e = NUL;
8893 
8894     /* now we have one wildcard component between "s" and "e" */
8895     /* Remove backslashes between "wildoff" and the start of the wildcard
8896      * component. */
8897     for (p = buf + wildoff; p < s; ++p)
8898 	if (rem_backslash(p))
8899 	{
8900 	    STRCPY(p, p + 1);
8901 	    --e;
8902 	    --s;
8903 	}
8904 
8905     /* Check for "**" between "s" and "e". */
8906     for (p = s; p < e; ++p)
8907 	if (p[0] == '*' && p[1] == '*')
8908 	    starstar = TRUE;
8909 
8910     /* convert the file pattern to a regexp pattern */
8911     starts_with_dot = (*s == '.');
8912     pat = file_pat_to_reg_pat(s, e, NULL, FALSE);
8913     if (pat == NULL)
8914     {
8915 	vim_free(buf);
8916 	return 0;
8917     }
8918 
8919     /* compile the regexp into a program */
8920 #ifdef CASE_INSENSITIVE_FILENAME
8921     regmatch.rm_ic = TRUE;		/* Behave like Terminal.app */
8922 #else
8923     regmatch.rm_ic = FALSE;		/* Don't ever ignore case */
8924 #endif
8925     regmatch.regprog = vim_regcomp(pat, RE_MAGIC);
8926     vim_free(pat);
8927 
8928     if (regmatch.regprog == NULL)
8929     {
8930 	vim_free(buf);
8931 	return 0;
8932     }
8933 
8934     /* If "**" is by itself, this is the first time we encounter it and more
8935      * is following then find matches without any directory. */
8936     if (!didstar && stardepth < 100 && starstar && e - s == 2
8937 							  && *path_end == '/')
8938     {
8939 	STRCPY(s, path_end + 1);
8940 	++stardepth;
8941 	(void)unix_expandpath(gap, buf, (int)(s - buf), flags, TRUE);
8942 	--stardepth;
8943     }
8944 
8945     /* open the directory for scanning */
8946     *s = NUL;
8947     dirp = opendir(*buf == NUL ? "." : (char *)buf);
8948 
8949     /* Find all matching entries */
8950     if (dirp != NULL)
8951     {
8952 	for (;;)
8953 	{
8954 	    dp = readdir(dirp);
8955 	    if (dp == NULL)
8956 		break;
8957 	    if ((dp->d_name[0] != '.' || starts_with_dot)
8958 		    && vim_regexec(&regmatch, (char_u *)dp->d_name, (colnr_T)0))
8959 	    {
8960 		STRCPY(s, dp->d_name);
8961 		len = STRLEN(buf);
8962 
8963 		if (starstar && stardepth < 100)
8964 		{
8965 		    /* For "**" in the pattern first go deeper in the tree to
8966 		     * find matches. */
8967 		    STRCPY(buf + len, "/**");
8968 		    STRCPY(buf + len + 3, path_end);
8969 		    ++stardepth;
8970 		    (void)unix_expandpath(gap, buf, len + 1, flags, TRUE);
8971 		    --stardepth;
8972 		}
8973 
8974 		STRCPY(buf + len, path_end);
8975 		if (mch_has_exp_wildcard(path_end)) /* handle more wildcards */
8976 		{
8977 		    /* need to expand another component of the path */
8978 		    /* remove backslashes for the remaining components only */
8979 		    (void)unix_expandpath(gap, buf, len + 1, flags, FALSE);
8980 		}
8981 		else
8982 		{
8983 		    /* no more wildcards, check if there is a match */
8984 		    /* remove backslashes for the remaining components only */
8985 		    if (*path_end != NUL)
8986 			backslash_halve(buf + len + 1);
8987 		    if (mch_getperm(buf) >= 0)	/* add existing file */
8988 		    {
8989 #ifdef MACOS_CONVERT
8990 			size_t precomp_len = STRLEN(buf)+1;
8991 			char_u *precomp_buf =
8992 			    mac_precompose_path(buf, precomp_len, &precomp_len);
8993 
8994 			if (precomp_buf)
8995 			{
8996 			    mch_memmove(buf, precomp_buf, precomp_len);
8997 			    vim_free(precomp_buf);
8998 			}
8999 #endif
9000 			addfile(gap, buf, flags);
9001 		    }
9002 		}
9003 	    }
9004 	}
9005 
9006 	closedir(dirp);
9007     }
9008 
9009     vim_free(buf);
9010     vim_free(regmatch.regprog);
9011 
9012     matches = gap->ga_len - start_len;
9013     if (matches > 0)
9014 	qsort(((char_u **)gap->ga_data) + start_len, matches,
9015 						   sizeof(char_u *), pstrcmp);
9016     return matches;
9017 }
9018 #endif
9019 
9020 /*
9021  * Generic wildcard expansion code.
9022  *
9023  * Characters in "pat" that should not be expanded must be preceded with a
9024  * backslash. E.g., "/path\ with\ spaces/my\*star*"
9025  *
9026  * Return FAIL when no single file was found.  In this case "num_file" is not
9027  * set, and "file" may contain an error message.
9028  * Return OK when some files found.  "num_file" is set to the number of
9029  * matches, "file" to the array of matches.  Call FreeWild() later.
9030  */
9031     int
9032 gen_expand_wildcards(num_pat, pat, num_file, file, flags)
9033     int		num_pat;	/* number of input patterns */
9034     char_u	**pat;		/* array of input patterns */
9035     int		*num_file;	/* resulting number of files */
9036     char_u	***file;	/* array of resulting files */
9037     int		flags;		/* EW_* flags */
9038 {
9039     int			i;
9040     garray_T		ga;
9041     char_u		*p;
9042     static int		recursive = FALSE;
9043     int			add_pat;
9044 
9045     /*
9046      * expand_env() is called to expand things like "~user".  If this fails,
9047      * it calls ExpandOne(), which brings us back here.  In this case, always
9048      * call the machine specific expansion function, if possible.  Otherwise,
9049      * return FAIL.
9050      */
9051     if (recursive)
9052 #ifdef SPECIAL_WILDCHAR
9053 	return mch_expand_wildcards(num_pat, pat, num_file, file, flags);
9054 #else
9055 	return FAIL;
9056 #endif
9057 
9058 #ifdef SPECIAL_WILDCHAR
9059     /*
9060      * If there are any special wildcard characters which we cannot handle
9061      * here, call machine specific function for all the expansion.  This
9062      * avoids starting the shell for each argument separately.
9063      * For `=expr` do use the internal function.
9064      */
9065     for (i = 0; i < num_pat; i++)
9066     {
9067 	if (vim_strpbrk(pat[i], (char_u *)SPECIAL_WILDCHAR) != NULL
9068 # ifdef VIM_BACKTICK
9069 		&& !(vim_backtick(pat[i]) && pat[i][1] == '=')
9070 # endif
9071 	   )
9072 	    return mch_expand_wildcards(num_pat, pat, num_file, file, flags);
9073     }
9074 #endif
9075 
9076     recursive = TRUE;
9077 
9078     /*
9079      * The matching file names are stored in a growarray.  Init it empty.
9080      */
9081     ga_init2(&ga, (int)sizeof(char_u *), 30);
9082 
9083     for (i = 0; i < num_pat; ++i)
9084     {
9085 	add_pat = -1;
9086 	p = pat[i];
9087 
9088 #ifdef VIM_BACKTICK
9089 	if (vim_backtick(p))
9090 	    add_pat = expand_backtick(&ga, p, flags);
9091 	else
9092 #endif
9093 	{
9094 	    /*
9095 	     * First expand environment variables, "~/" and "~user/".
9096 	     */
9097 	    if (vim_strpbrk(p, (char_u *)"$~") != NULL)
9098 	    {
9099 		p = expand_env_save(p);
9100 		if (p == NULL)
9101 		    p = pat[i];
9102 #ifdef UNIX
9103 		/*
9104 		 * On Unix, if expand_env() can't expand an environment
9105 		 * variable, use the shell to do that.  Discard previously
9106 		 * found file names and start all over again.
9107 		 */
9108 		else if (vim_strpbrk(p, (char_u *)"$~") != NULL)
9109 		{
9110 		    vim_free(p);
9111 		    ga_clear(&ga);
9112 		    i = mch_expand_wildcards(num_pat, pat, num_file, file,
9113 								       flags);
9114 		    recursive = FALSE;
9115 		    return i;
9116 		}
9117 #endif
9118 	    }
9119 
9120 	    /*
9121 	     * If there are wildcards: Expand file names and add each match to
9122 	     * the list.  If there is no match, and EW_NOTFOUND is given, add
9123 	     * the pattern.
9124 	     * If there are no wildcards: Add the file name if it exists or
9125 	     * when EW_NOTFOUND is given.
9126 	     */
9127 	    if (mch_has_exp_wildcard(p))
9128 		add_pat = mch_expandpath(&ga, p, flags);
9129 	}
9130 
9131 	if (add_pat == -1 || (add_pat == 0 && (flags & EW_NOTFOUND)))
9132 	{
9133 	    char_u	*t = backslash_halve_save(p);
9134 
9135 #if defined(MACOS_CLASSIC)
9136 	    slash_to_colon(t);
9137 #endif
9138 	    /* When EW_NOTFOUND is used, always add files and dirs.  Makes
9139 	     * "vim c:/" work. */
9140 	    if (flags & EW_NOTFOUND)
9141 		addfile(&ga, t, flags | EW_DIR | EW_FILE);
9142 	    else if (mch_getperm(t) >= 0)
9143 		addfile(&ga, t, flags);
9144 	    vim_free(t);
9145 	}
9146 
9147 	if (p != pat[i])
9148 	    vim_free(p);
9149     }
9150 
9151     *num_file = ga.ga_len;
9152     *file = (ga.ga_data != NULL) ? (char_u **)ga.ga_data : (char_u **)"";
9153 
9154     recursive = FALSE;
9155 
9156     return (ga.ga_data != NULL) ? OK : FAIL;
9157 }
9158 
9159 # ifdef VIM_BACKTICK
9160 
9161 /*
9162  * Return TRUE if we can expand this backtick thing here.
9163  */
9164     static int
9165 vim_backtick(p)
9166     char_u	*p;
9167 {
9168     return (*p == '`' && *(p + 1) != NUL && *(p + STRLEN(p) - 1) == '`');
9169 }
9170 
9171 /*
9172  * Expand an item in `backticks` by executing it as a command.
9173  * Currently only works when pat[] starts and ends with a `.
9174  * Returns number of file names found.
9175  */
9176     static int
9177 expand_backtick(gap, pat, flags)
9178     garray_T	*gap;
9179     char_u	*pat;
9180     int		flags;	/* EW_* flags */
9181 {
9182     char_u	*p;
9183     char_u	*cmd;
9184     char_u	*buffer;
9185     int		cnt = 0;
9186     int		i;
9187 
9188     /* Create the command: lop off the backticks. */
9189     cmd = vim_strnsave(pat + 1, (int)STRLEN(pat) - 2);
9190     if (cmd == NULL)
9191 	return 0;
9192 
9193 #ifdef FEAT_EVAL
9194     if (*cmd == '=')	    /* `={expr}`: Expand expression */
9195 	buffer = eval_to_string(cmd + 1, &p, TRUE);
9196     else
9197 #endif
9198 	buffer = get_cmd_output(cmd, NULL,
9199 				      (flags & EW_SILENT) ? SHELL_SILENT : 0);
9200     vim_free(cmd);
9201     if (buffer == NULL)
9202 	return 0;
9203 
9204     cmd = buffer;
9205     while (*cmd != NUL)
9206     {
9207 	cmd = skipwhite(cmd);		/* skip over white space */
9208 	p = cmd;
9209 	while (*p != NUL && *p != '\r' && *p != '\n') /* skip over entry */
9210 	    ++p;
9211 	/* add an entry if it is not empty */
9212 	if (p > cmd)
9213 	{
9214 	    i = *p;
9215 	    *p = NUL;
9216 	    addfile(gap, cmd, flags);
9217 	    *p = i;
9218 	    ++cnt;
9219 	}
9220 	cmd = p;
9221 	while (*cmd != NUL && (*cmd == '\r' || *cmd == '\n'))
9222 	    ++cmd;
9223     }
9224 
9225     vim_free(buffer);
9226     return cnt;
9227 }
9228 # endif /* VIM_BACKTICK */
9229 
9230 /*
9231  * Add a file to a file list.  Accepted flags:
9232  * EW_DIR	add directories
9233  * EW_FILE	add files
9234  * EW_EXEC	add executable files
9235  * EW_NOTFOUND	add even when it doesn't exist
9236  * EW_ADDSLASH	add slash after directory name
9237  */
9238     void
9239 addfile(gap, f, flags)
9240     garray_T	*gap;
9241     char_u	*f;	/* filename */
9242     int		flags;
9243 {
9244     char_u	*p;
9245     int		isdir;
9246 
9247     /* if the file/dir doesn't exist, may not add it */
9248     if (!(flags & EW_NOTFOUND) && mch_getperm(f) < 0)
9249 	return;
9250 
9251 #ifdef FNAME_ILLEGAL
9252     /* if the file/dir contains illegal characters, don't add it */
9253     if (vim_strpbrk(f, (char_u *)FNAME_ILLEGAL) != NULL)
9254 	return;
9255 #endif
9256 
9257     isdir = mch_isdir(f);
9258     if ((isdir && !(flags & EW_DIR)) || (!isdir && !(flags & EW_FILE)))
9259 	return;
9260 
9261     /* If the file isn't executable, may not add it.  Do accept directories. */
9262     if (!isdir && (flags & EW_EXEC) && !mch_can_exe(f))
9263 	return;
9264 
9265     /* Make room for another item in the file list. */
9266     if (ga_grow(gap, 1) == FAIL)
9267 	return;
9268 
9269     p = alloc((unsigned)(STRLEN(f) + 1 + isdir));
9270     if (p == NULL)
9271 	return;
9272 
9273     STRCPY(p, f);
9274 #ifdef BACKSLASH_IN_FILENAME
9275     slash_adjust(p);
9276 #endif
9277     /*
9278      * Append a slash or backslash after directory names if none is present.
9279      */
9280 #ifndef DONT_ADD_PATHSEP_TO_DIR
9281     if (isdir && (flags & EW_ADDSLASH))
9282 	add_pathsep(p);
9283 #endif
9284     ((char_u **)gap->ga_data)[gap->ga_len++] = p;
9285 }
9286 #endif /* !NO_EXPANDPATH */
9287 
9288 #if defined(VIM_BACKTICK) || defined(FEAT_EVAL) || defined(PROTO)
9289 
9290 #ifndef SEEK_SET
9291 # define SEEK_SET 0
9292 #endif
9293 #ifndef SEEK_END
9294 # define SEEK_END 2
9295 #endif
9296 
9297 /*
9298  * Get the stdout of an external command.
9299  * Returns an allocated string, or NULL for error.
9300  */
9301     char_u *
9302 get_cmd_output(cmd, infile, flags)
9303     char_u	*cmd;
9304     char_u	*infile;	/* optional input file name */
9305     int		flags;		/* can be SHELL_SILENT */
9306 {
9307     char_u	*tempname;
9308     char_u	*command;
9309     char_u	*buffer = NULL;
9310     int		len;
9311     int		i = 0;
9312     FILE	*fd;
9313 
9314     if (check_restricted() || check_secure())
9315 	return NULL;
9316 
9317     /* get a name for the temp file */
9318     if ((tempname = vim_tempname('o')) == NULL)
9319     {
9320 	EMSG(_(e_notmp));
9321 	return NULL;
9322     }
9323 
9324     /* Add the redirection stuff */
9325     command = make_filter_cmd(cmd, infile, tempname);
9326     if (command == NULL)
9327 	goto done;
9328 
9329     /*
9330      * Call the shell to execute the command (errors are ignored).
9331      * Don't check timestamps here.
9332      */
9333     ++no_check_timestamps;
9334     call_shell(command, SHELL_DOOUT | SHELL_EXPAND | flags);
9335     --no_check_timestamps;
9336 
9337     vim_free(command);
9338 
9339     /*
9340      * read the names from the file into memory
9341      */
9342 # ifdef VMS
9343     /* created temporary file is not allways readable as binary */
9344     fd = mch_fopen((char *)tempname, "r");
9345 # else
9346     fd = mch_fopen((char *)tempname, READBIN);
9347 # endif
9348 
9349     if (fd == NULL)
9350     {
9351 	EMSG2(_(e_notopen), tempname);
9352 	goto done;
9353     }
9354 
9355     fseek(fd, 0L, SEEK_END);
9356     len = ftell(fd);		    /* get size of temp file */
9357     fseek(fd, 0L, SEEK_SET);
9358 
9359     buffer = alloc(len + 1);
9360     if (buffer != NULL)
9361 	i = (int)fread((char *)buffer, (size_t)1, (size_t)len, fd);
9362     fclose(fd);
9363     mch_remove(tempname);
9364     if (buffer == NULL)
9365 	goto done;
9366 #ifdef VMS
9367     len = i;	/* VMS doesn't give us what we asked for... */
9368 #endif
9369     if (i != len)
9370     {
9371 	EMSG2(_(e_notread), tempname);
9372 	vim_free(buffer);
9373 	buffer = NULL;
9374     }
9375     else
9376 	buffer[len] = '\0';	/* make sure the buffer is terminated */
9377 
9378 done:
9379     vim_free(tempname);
9380     return buffer;
9381 }
9382 #endif
9383 
9384 /*
9385  * Free the list of files returned by expand_wildcards() or other expansion
9386  * functions.
9387  */
9388     void
9389 FreeWild(count, files)
9390     int	    count;
9391     char_u  **files;
9392 {
9393     if (count <= 0 || files == NULL)
9394 	return;
9395 #if defined(__EMX__) && defined(__ALWAYS_HAS_TRAILING_NULL_POINTER) /* XXX */
9396     /*
9397      * Is this still OK for when other functions than expand_wildcards() have
9398      * been used???
9399      */
9400     _fnexplodefree((char **)files);
9401 #else
9402     while (count--)
9403 	vim_free(files[count]);
9404     vim_free(files);
9405 #endif
9406 }
9407 
9408 /*
9409  * return TRUE when need to go to Insert mode because of 'insertmode'.
9410  * Don't do this when still processing a command or a mapping.
9411  * Don't do this when inside a ":normal" command.
9412  */
9413     int
9414 goto_im()
9415 {
9416     return (p_im && stuff_empty() && typebuf_typed());
9417 }
9418